| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080200170 | Method For Requesting an Unregistered Ue to Perform Registration in the Ims - The method for requesting an Internet Multimedia Sub-system (IMS) unregistered User Equipment (UE) to perform IMS registration including initiating an IMS domain session or sending an IMS relevant signaling to a called subscriber by a UE A; informing the UE A information that the called subscriber has not registered with the IMS by the network; requesting the called terminal to conduct IMS registration by the UE A; and restarting the IMS session after the called terminal completes the IMS registration. An IMS unregistered UE can also perform IMS service. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080207202 | Apparatus and method for providing a user interface for facilitating communications between devices - An apparatus and method for providing a user interface for facilitating communications between devices are provided. According to one aspect, an interface device provides communications between a first device and a second device. The interface device has an input for receiving data in a first format from the first device. Logic within the interface device is configured to receive a request to interact with the interface device and to provide a user interface in response to receiving the request. The logic identifies a second device for receiving the data from the first device. The logic identifies a second format that is compatible with the second device and translates the data to the second format. The interface device further has an output for transmitting the translated data to the second device. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080207203 | ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION OF A DEVICE IN A MOBILE COMMERCE SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and machine-readable media are disclosed for registering a mobile device for use in a mobile commerce system. According to one embodiment, a method of registering a mobile device for use in a mobile commerce system can comprise receiving at a service provider system a registration request from a user of the mobile device. A determination can be made with the service provider system whether to allow registration of the mobile device. In response to determining to allow registration of the mobile device, the registration request can be sent from the service provider system to an acquirer system. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080214190 | Circuit switched domain services with long term evolution/sytem architecture evolution access - An apparatus and method including attaching a user equipment to a long term evolution system and simultaneously registering the user equipment attached to the long term evolution system to a circuit switched domain, is disclosed. The user equipment is simultaneously registered based on an interface between a mobility management entity and a mobile switching center server. For a mobile originated call from the user equipment attached to the long term evolution system, an enhanced call control is carried via the mobility management entity to the mobile switching center server. For a mobile terminated call, an enhanced call control is carried via the mobility management entity to the mobile switching center server, after the mobile switching center server pages the user equipment. The user equipment is offered existing circuit switched domain services while connected to the long term evolution system. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080220775 | Apparatus, method, and computer-readable medium for securely providing communications between devices and networks - An apparatus, method, and computer-readable medium for securely providing communications between devices and networks are provided. According to one aspect of the invention, an interface device for providing communications between a first communications network and a device associated with a second communications network comprises an input, an output, logic, and a security program to restrict access to the input or the output of the interface device, connected devices or associated communication networks. The one or more inputs of the interface device receive data in a first format from the first communications network. The logic translates the data to a second format compatible with the second communications device. The translated data is then transmitted to the device associated with the second communications network via the one or more outputs. The security program determines whether a device or user is authorized to receive data prior to granting access to the data. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080220776 | Interface devices for facilitating communications between devices and communications networks - Interface devices for facilitating communications between devices and communications networks are provided. According to one aspect, a destination interface device for providing communications between a first device and a second device comprises one or more inputs, one or more outputs, and logic. The one or more inputs of the destination interface device receive data in a first format from a source interface device. The logic translates the data to a second format compatible with the second device. The translated data is then transmitted to the second device via the one or more outputs. The destination interface device may subscribe to the source interface device for access to enhanced features as well as for access to data associated with communications networks and devices. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080220777 | Method and Device For Identifying a Mobile Terminal in a Digital Cellular Mobile Radio Network - The invention relates to a method and a simulator ( | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080227450 | Indoor call control apparatus associated with public mobile network - A public mobile terminal can use both of a public mobile communication service and an extension service while protecting an SIP message by an IP sec. An indoor call control apparatus that receives an INVITE message from the public mobile terminal has a destination determination table that determines whether the called terminal is an indoor terminal, or not. When the terminal is the indoor terminal, a Route header is deleted from the INVITE message, and the message is transmitted to the called terminal. When the called terminal is not the indoor terminal, the INVITE message is transmitted to an S-CSCF of a calling terminal on the basis of the contents of the Route header. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080227451 | HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER CONFIGURATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - The present invention is to provide a home subscriber server configuration method and system that is accessible in switching to any one of plural HSS servers in a redundant configuration. Information stored in such plural HSS servers (e.g., HSS-A server | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080233956 | Method and system for location-based communication - A method and system for location-based communication. A selection of a source transceiver from a plurality of available transceivers associated with a source may be received. A telephony session may be initiated with the selected source transceiver. A mobile target transceiver may be geographically located. A result of the geographic location regarding the located mobile target transceiver may be provided. The located mobile target transceiver may be connected to the telephony session. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080233957 | Profile information synchronization system, profile information synchronization method, mobile terminal device and profile information synchronization server - Profile information of mobile terminal devices of users is synchronized by transmitting profile information of a user of a mobile terminal device along with a group identification information to a profile information synchronization server, registering by the server received profile information in correspondence with received group identification information, based upon the transmitting, extracting by the server one or more of the profile information managed based upon the received group identification information of the group to which the user of the terminal device belongs including new profile information that the terminal device has not recorded and transmitting the extracted profile information to the terminal device. The terminal device obtains the profile information of the group to which the user of the terminal device belongs including the new profile information that the terminal device itself has not recorded, from the server based upon the group identification information. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080254791 | IMS COMMUNICATION NODE PROXIES AND METHODS - Systems and methods for splitting communication nodes to provide inter-domain functionality are described. For example, a home subscriber services (HSS) node can be split into a proxy node in a first domain and a non-proxy node in a second domain. The proxy node may or may not include a subset of the data available on the corresponding non-proxy node. An inter-domain interface, e.g., a GUP interface, can be employed between the proxy node and the non-proxy node and the inter-domain protocol server can be used to facilitate other interfaces, e.g., between a home location register (HLR) and other entities. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080254792 | Controlling Access To Private Access Points For Wireless Networking - An invitation to use a personal access point to access a wireless network is transmitted to an access terminal. An indication that the invitation has been accepted is received and the personal access point is authorized to provide the access terminal with access to the network. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080254793 | System accounting in a multiprocessor environment - In one embodiment, a method can include: (i) assigning an attribute to each of a plurality of processors, and designating one of the plurality of processors as a proxy processor; (ii) when a user session begins using a first of the plurality of processors, sending a first notification message to a server; and (iii) when a rebooting of the first processor occurs: (a) suppressing a second notification message from the first processor in the proxy processor; and (b) sending a third notification message with the attribute to the server to enable the server to modify a user file in the server using the attribute. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080254794 | GW coupled SIP proxy - In one embodiment, a method can include: (i) performing an initial authentication with a mobile device in an access gateway, the access gateway being a point of attachment; (ii) forwarding a first message from the mobile device to an edge proxy; (iii) receiving a second message from the edge proxy; and (iv) returning a modified version of the second message to the edge proxy for a final authentication of the mobile device. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080254795 | IP multimedia subsystem virtual call/session control functions - Systems and methods provide virtual CSCFs in an IMS system. The Virtual CSCFs may be virtual S-CSCFs or virtual P-CSCFs. A master virtual CSCF may be used to distribute subscriber data and initial filter criteria to the virtual CSCFs in a group. Thus one of multiple servers may be used for processing call sessions for the same subscriber, thereby avoiding overloading a particular CSCF in an IMS system. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080261591 | Method for Transmitting Application-Specific Registration or De-Registration Data and System, Server and Communication Terminal Therefor - A communication system having a communication terminal and a server, wherein the communication terminal has a signaling device which is configured to transmit to the server an information element which specifies whether at least one application installed on the communication terminal uses Multimedia Messaging Service as a transport medium for transmission of data, and wherein the server has a control device which is configured to carry out a control action as a function of the transmitted information element. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080261592 | METHOD TO IMPROVE THE REGISTRATION OF IN AN NGN-IMS SUBSYSTEM - A method to improve the registration of “Permanently Registered Users” (User1, User2, . . . User500) in an NGN-IMS subsystem. The permanently registered users are coupled to the IMS subsystem via a group device (AGW1, IP-PBX, SIP/H.323 GW) that is registered in the IMS subsystem as a dedicated IMS virtual user by means of its IMPI/IMPU identifier. The HSS/UPSF server is then allowed to download the user profiles in bulk. This results in fewer loads on the IMS and in a shortened start-up time of the group device(s). | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080261593 | Systems and methods for IMS user sessions with dynamic service selection - Under one aspect, a system generates dynamic call models within an IMS network, allowing different user entities (UEs) to have different service experiences. The IMS network includes application servers (ASs) and a serving call state control function (S-CSCF) that receives and then forwards UE service requests. The system includes storage media storing a service tree, which defines potential call models that map potential UE service requests onto ASs. At least two potential call models map a specified potential UE service request onto different ASs that can provide different service experiences. The system includes control logic for providing session control, which receives UE service requests from the S-CSCF, receives the service tree from the storage media, generates a call model for each UE based on potential call models defined by the service tree and on the requested service, and invokes a specified AS based on the generated call model. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080261594 | COMPLETE MESSAGE DELIVERY TO MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system and method for complete message delivery to a multi-mode communication device is presented. The communication device is adaptable to communicate with one or more carrier networks and one or more data networks. When a new message is received for the communication device, a message notification is sent to the device via a first network. The communication device parses the message notification and retrieves the complete message via a second network. Alternatively, the message notification may be delivered and the complete message may be retrieved via the same network. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080268839 | Reducing a number of registration termination massages in a network for cellular devices - Embodiments of the present invention pertain to reducing a number of registration termination messages in a network for cellular devices. According to one embodiment, information is received at a server indicating that a first network entity associated with the network is providing a service to a cellular device. Information is received at the server indicating that a second network entity associated with the network is providing the service to the cellular device. Logic associated with the server is executed to determine whether to send a registration termination message to the first network entity. The logic enables the server to send a registration termination message to one of a plurality of network entities that communicates with the server without requiring the server to send a registration termination message to another of the plurality of network entities. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080268840 | Apparatus and Method for Controlling a Radio Bearer Reconfiguration - An apparatus for controlling a radio bearer reconfiguration in a cellular communication system, such as a UMTS communication system, comprises a reconfiguration instigator ( | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080268841 | Method of Registering a Battery-Powered Device in a Wireless Network - Registering or reconfiguring a battery-powered device in a network, comprising monitoring the occurrence of an event in the device during its idle state, i.e. the occurrence of an idle interval time-out during which the device is held in the idle state. When the device has detected said event, it is put into an initiation state for the duration of an initiation interval in which the device initiates a registration procedure. If the initiation interval ends without proper response to the initiation of the registration procedure, the idle state during idle intervals alternates with the initiation state during initiation intervals until the device has entered the state of normal operation. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080268842 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UTILIZING A TEMPORARY USER IDENTITY IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A system and method for allocating an S-TMSI in a telecommunication system. The System includes a UE operating within a tracking area of a Public Land Mobile Network. A Mobility Management Entity controls allocation of the S-TMSI to the UE. The S-TMSI has a 32-bit structure with a discriminator for discriminating Circuit Switched, CS, services and Packet Switched, PS, services utilized by the UE. The discriminator utilizes the two significant bits to indicate the CS or PS services. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080274738 | Method For Communication Between A Wlan Radio Station And A Base Station Of A Cellular Radio Communications System, And Corresponding Radio Station And Base Station - A radio facility receives a request, which is made by a first radio station and which is routed by a second radio station to the radio facility, regarding a future sending of a message from the first radio station to a third radio station. In addition, the radio facility sends, to at least one or to each radio station of a path, which extends over one or more radio stations and via which the message can be transmitted from the first radio station to the third radio station by routing it through radio stations of the path, information concerning the radio station adjacent to the respective radio station of the path along said path in the direction of the third radio station and, optionally, also information concerning radio resources to be used in the event of a routing of the message through the respective radio station of the path. A radio facility and a radio station carry out said method. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080274739 | Method of Informing a Network of Change of User Equipment Capability - A method of informing a network of a change of user equipment capability includes: stopping a registration timer on the user side set currently when the user equipment capability changes; sending a register request message carrying information of new user equipment capability to the network; analyzing, by the network, the register request message, and storing the information of new user equipment capability for reference by subsequent establishment of a session; stopping a current registration timer on the server side set for the user equipment; initiating a new registration timer on the server side for the user equipment; sending a response message carrying information of the new registration timer on the server side to the user equipment; resetting the registration timer on the user side based on information of the new registration timer on the server side in the response message. The capability change is informed to the network in time. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080274740 | SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING THE AVAILABILITY OF A DEVICE TO RECEIVE FORWARD DATA - System for signaling the availability of a device to receive forward data. A method is provided that includes receiving an information message to be transmitted to the device, and transmitting a registration cancellation message to cancel registration of the device at a visiting location register. The method also includes receiving a registration message to register the device on a communication network, and transmitting the information message to the device. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080280606 | INCREASING SYSTEM CAPACITY VIA UTILIZATION OF END USER EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE - A method and information processing system are provided for dynamically encoding a control channel for transmitting messages to a wireless device based on performance capability information associated with the wireless device. The method includes determining that a wireless device ( | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080280607 | System for changing location registration - A mobile terminal, which is registered to either a first mobile communication network or a second communication network, determines whether it is possible to register to the first mobile communication network on the basis of control information received fi-om the second mobile communication network. Then, the mobile terminal attempts to register to the first mobile communication network a predetermined number of times in a case that it is determined that it is possible to register to the first mobile communication network. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080280608 | Enhanced Timer Based Registration Method for Wireless Communication Networks - Techniques and systems that provide enhanced timer based registration for efficiently registering access terminals with a wireless network. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080280609 | Provisioning of User Information - The present invention relates to method and arrangements to provide information related to user devices in a telecommunication system (TS). The system comprises at least one network domain (HPLMN, WCDMA) that is associated with a central database (DCR). The method comprises identification in the central database (DCR) of a first request (REQ | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080287128 | Server - A service processing server for providing a communication processing service with an information providing server, to a cell phone belonging to a network capable of identifying subordinate cell phones, and including an application receiving part for receiving first communication terminal-specific information to specify a specific cell phone, and service-specific information in association with each other; a specific information generating part for generating second communication terminal-specific information; an approval requesting part for transmitting approval request information containing the service-specific information and the second communication terminal-specific information, to the information providing server; a result receiving part for receiving approval result information returned; and a registering part for performing a registration process for providing the communication processing service to the specific cell phone in accordance with reception of the approval result information. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080293411 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING OBFUSCATED MOBILE DEVICE USER IDENTITIES - A mobile device identifier (such as an MSISDN) that typically accompanies a mobile device request is replaced with an “enriched” identifier that exposes the mobile device user's home operator but obfuscates the mobile device's (and, thus, the device user's) identity. In one embodiment, the identifier comprises a first part, and a second part. The first part comprises a data string that identifies (either directly or through a database lookup) the mobile device user's home operator. The second part, however, is an opaque data string, such as a one-time-use unique identifier (UID) or a value that is otherwise derived as a function of the MSISDN (or the like). The opaque data string encodes the mobile device's identity in a manner that preferably can be recovered only by the user's home operator. The present invention describes a method and apparatus for use in a home network to manage the generation, storage and use of the unique identifiers. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080293412 | Location update with multipoint functionality - The present invention provides methods for performing a location update in a mobile communication network. According to an embodiment of the invention, after receiving a location update request message from a managing node, a data base composes a location update acknowledge message including information about an identification of a switching device. Then the data base transmits the location update acknowledge message including information about the identification of the switching device to the managing node. According to another embodiment, after receiving a message from a second managing node, a first managing node composes a reply message including information about an identification of a switching device. Then the first managing node transmits the reply message including information about the identification of the switching device to the second managing node. Further, the present invention also relates to respective devices. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080293413 | System and Method of Registering with an Access Point - A method of registering a mobile device with an access point, is provided in which the mobile device preregisters with access points nearby in order to accelerate the registration process when roaming is initiated. Roaming may be initiated when the SNR is increasing relative to the current access point and decreasing relative to another access point. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080299969 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEREGISTERING OUT-OF-COVERAGE RANGE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for deregistering wireless devices from a registration server for a wireless local area network, comprising: sending an initial registration request message from a wireless device to the registration server, the initial registration request message including an initial expiration interval; measuring radio signal strength at the wireless device; and, determining whether the radio signal strength has decreased to below a predetermined level and, if so, sending an updated registration request message from the wireless device to the registration server, the updated registration request message including an updated expiration interval less than the initial expiration interval thereby allowing timely deregistering of the wireless device by the registration server. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080299970 | Consumer Registration Via Mobile Device - Exemplary embodiments provide systems and methods to receive a transmission that is associated with an identification number and includes a number associated with a land line, determine a physical address based on the number associated with the land line, confirm the physical address that was determined, and associate the physical address with a user account, the user account being identified by the identification number. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080299971 | PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTAL CONTENT TO AN IMS USER DURING REGISTRATION - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing supplemental content to a user of a communication device during registration. When a communication device attempts to register with an IMS network, the IMS network receives a register request message from the communication device, and processes the register request message to register the communication device. The IMS network also identifies supplemental content to provide to the communication device, such as account information, weather content, news, location information, advertisements, etc. The IMS network generates a register response message, and embeds or otherwise includes the supplemental content in the register response message. The IMS network then transmits the register response message to the communication device. Responsive to receiving the register response message, the communication device identifies the supplemental content in the register response message, and provides the supplemental content to the user. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080305791 | PEER-TO-PEER WIDE AREA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080305792 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Network Based Service Access Control for Femtocells - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first wireless communication system and a second wireless communication system that includes a Femtocell access point (FAP) and a network controller that can communicatively couple the FAP to the first wireless communication system. In some embodiments, the network controller can communicatively couple to the first wireless communication system through a UTRAN Iu interface. Some embodiments provide a resource management method that determines that a user equipment (UE) has roved in a region serviced by the FAP. The FAP includes a generic access resource control (GA-RC) protocol sub-layer. The method creates a separate GA-RC state dedicated to the UE in the GA-RC protocol sub-layer. The method also sets the GA-RC state dedicated to the UE to a deregistered state to indicate that the UE is not registered to use the services of the second wireless communication system. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080305793 | Method and Apparatus for Exchanging User Equipment and Network Controller Capabilities in a Communication System - Some embodiments provide a method of registering a user equipment (UE) in a communication system that includes a licensed wireless communication system and a generic access network (GAN) that has a generic access network controller (GANC). The method sends a register request message from the UE to the GANC that indicates a GAN mode capability of A/Gb only for the UE. When the GANC has a GAN mode capability of A/Gb, the GANC registers the UE with the GAN. When the GANC has a GAN mode capability of Iu only, the GANC rejects the register request message. When the GANC has a GAN mode capability of both A/Gb and Iu, the GANC registers the UE based on a set of GANC mode selection rules that the GANC applies for registering UEs with the GAN. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080305794 | CALL SESSION CONTROL SERVER ASSIGNMENT METHOD AND CALL SESSION CONTROL SERVER ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM - The present invention provides a call session control server assignment method and system for equalizing loads of a plurality of call session control servers (S-CSCF servers). For this end, the HSS server | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080305795 | INFORMATION PROVISION SYSTEM - A system includes: a user-operated terminal operated by a user holding a mobile communication terminal; and an information notification apparatus capable of communicating with the mobile communication terminal, wherein the user-operated terminal includes: spot identification information acquisition means for acquiring spot identification information; and spot registration requesting means for requesting registration of a spot by transmitting the spot identification information and user identification information identifying the user operating the user-operated terminal to the information notification apparatus, and the information notification apparatus includes: spot registration means for registering location information about the spot corresponding to the spot identification information for the user corresponding to the user identification information transmitted from the user-operated terminal; terminal location detection means for detecting the current location of the mobile communication terminal; and notification means for notifying the mobile communication terminal if the detected current location of the mobile communication terminal is within a preset distance from the location of the registered spot. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080311906 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTHENTICATING MOBILE NODE IN THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for performing device authentication and user authentication in a mobile communication network are provided. A connection is established between an MS and an SRNC that controls communications of the MS through a BS. The SRNC receives a D-MSK for device authentication of the MS from an AAA server that has completed an EAP negotiation with the MS and stores the D-MSK by the SRNC, when the BS triggers an EAP authentication after the connection establishment. The SRNC receives an R-MSK from an AG and stores the R-MSK after the connection establishment. The R-MSK is generated using a U-MSK for user authentication of the MS received from the AAA server by the AG. The SRNC generates a PMK for use during a session using at least one of the D-MSK and the R-MSK, and one of the BS and the SRNC generate a key set using the PMK, for use in at least one of data encryption, data integrity check, and session management during the session. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080311907 | Identifying Communications Between Telecommunications Networks - A telecommunications system is disclosed including a host telecommunications network (A) having a radio access network ( | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080311908 | Method and Apparatus for Zonecode-Based Registration in Active State in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for ZoneCode-based registration is described. A list of RegistrationZoneCodes is stored, wherein the list of RegistrationZoneCodes is associated with subnets visited by the access terminal. It is determined if a protocol cache information is keyed by a (Subnet, RegistrationZoneCode) pair. The cached information is deleted when the (Subnet, RegistrationZoneCode) pair is deleted from a RegistrationZoneCodeList. N | 12-18-2008 |
| 20090005038 | Techniques for conference scheduling - A technique for scheduling conferences includes receiving a conference request, which includes an invitee list, a prioritized list of preferred media types, and one or more times for a conference associated with the conference request. The conference is requested with respective invitees associated with the invitee list (via respective subscriber terminals) and it is determined whether the respective invitees can be scheduled for the conference. The conference is scheduled between a conference requester (associated with the conference request) and available ones of the respective invitees, when mandatory attendees, included within the respective invitees, are available. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090005039 | PROVIDING USER INTERFACE DATA ON A MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE - A system and a method are provided for managing network activation with a carrier and registration with a service provider. In one example, the method determines a network activation status. If the network is not activated, a utility is used to perform the activation. Further, the status of registration with a provider is determined. If not registered, a request is sent to a server of the service provider for a registration file configured to gather user registration information. The registration file is then received from the server. The registration file is executed on the personal computer. Data gathered by the registration file is then returned to the service provider's server to complete the registration procedures. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090005040 | Method and computer system for matching mobile device users for business and social networking - A business or social networking method is operative in a server. The method enables mobile device users to meet one another, on a permission basis. The determination of whether a given pair of mobile device users are introduced depends on whether the server determines they are in intellectual or “cognitive” proximity, which is typically a function of one or more factors, such as: each user's reciprocal networking objective, the nature of the industry in which the user works, the user's level within the management hierarchy of his or her company, any specialty function the individual may possess, and so on. Individuals who are matched in one or more of such attributes to a given degree or threshold are said to be in intellectual proximity. According to the invention, when given mobile devices users are within physical proximity of one another during an overlapping time window, the server determines whether the users are also within a given intellectual proximity. If so, and if both users have opted to receive new introductions, the server issues a mutual collaboration opportunity message to each of the mobile device users to determine whether they desire to be introduced to one another. Preferably, the mutual collaboration opportunity message masks personally identifying information. If the mobile device users agree to be introduced, the server establishes a direct private messaging session between them. In an alternative embodiment, a mobile device user initiates a contact by performing a networking search query that identifies one or more prospects who can then be contacted by the mobile device user asynchronously. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090011763 | EMBEDDING USER EQUIPMENT INFORMATION WITHIN THIRD PART REGISTRATION MESSAGES - A method, information processing system, and wireless communications system for providing dynamic information associated with at least one of a wireless device and a network to at least one application server. The method includes receiving a registration message ( | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090017819 | Restricting The Use Of Mobile Terminals Based On Forced Location Updating - A method and apparatus for temporarily disabling a mobile terminal which is associable with a mobile telecommunications network for obtaining communication services therefrom is described. A base station simulator ( | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090023444 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes: a subscriber information storage device configured to store subscriber information; a registration unit configured to register, in addition to first subscriber information, second subscriber information in the subscriber information storage device, as sub-registrant subscriber information of a first terminal unit, the first subscriber information being the subscriber information associated with a first terminal unit, and the second subscriber information being the subscriber information associated with a second terminal unit; and a reception processor configured to acquire the sub-registrant subscriber information associated with the first subscriber information by referring to the subscriber information storage device, when transmission is made to the first terminal unit, and subsequently to perform processing of reception at the second terminal unit with use of the sub-registrant subscriber information. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090023445 | Home Network Name Displaying Methods And Apparatus For Multiple Home Networks - A network name displaying method involves maintaining access to a Home Public Land Mobile Network (HPLMN) list and a Preferred PLMN (PPLMN) list, the HPLMN list identifying a plurality of home networks and the PPLMN list identifying a plurality of non-home roaming networks; maintaining access to a home network display name associated with the HPLMN list; comparing a MCC and MNC pair of a selected wireless network with a plurality of home network MCC and MNC pairs corresponding to the plurality of home networks; in response to identifying a match between the MCC and MNC pair of the selected wireless network and any one of the home network MCC and MNC pairs: causing the home network display name to be displayed; and if there is no match between the MCC and MNC pair of the selected wireless network and the home network MCC and MNC pairs: causing an alternate display name corresponding to the non-home roaming network to be displayed. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090029699 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING A PERCEIVABLE PHYSICAL INDICATION OF SERVICE AVAILABILITY - An apparatus, method and computer program product are provided for directing a device to emit a perceivable physical indication (e.g., noise, light, vibration, smell, etc.), in order to indicate to a user that the device provides a particular service of interest to the user. A user may request a list of the instances of a service (e.g., printer service, audio service, display service, etc.) available within a certain area. Upon receipt of the list of instances of a particular service, the user may select respective instances one by one such that the device on which each instance is executed emits a perceivable physical indication. This physical indication enables the user to determine where the device is located and how it is situated, information which the user can use to determine which device, or instance of the service, he or she should select. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090029700 | SYSTEM FOR REGISTRATION OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a mobile Voice over IP (VoIP) communication device (MVCD) having a controller element to register with a VoIP call processing system by way of a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) access point operating in a cluster of WiFi access points each having cell coverage area, and re-register with the VoIP call processing system by way of the WiFi access point in response to receiving a re-registration request upon expiration of a timer having a period determined from one or more behavioral attributes of the MVCD. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090029701 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREFOR - To effectively prevent information leakage from a communication node, such as a cellular phone. Not an actual communication-destination telephone number, but a telephone number code which is arbitrarily assigned corresponding to the actual communication-destination telephone number, and information required for telephone number selection are registered in an address book of a cellular phone | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090029702 | System and Method for Collecting and Analyzing User Information - The present invention is to provide system and method for collecting and analyzing user information. The system comprises an information carrier, for carrying information; a mobile terminal, comprising an information reading apparatus for reading information on the information carrier; and an ID storing device for storing the ID of the mobile terminal; a communication network; and an information server which receives the information on the information carrier and the ID of the mobile terminal from the mobile terminal through the communication network, and performs a statistics and analysis thereon. The present invention can achieve real-time and continuous information collection and analysis, and may also push advertisement information to users based on the collection and analysis of the information instantly or conditionally. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090036125 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REGISTRATION FOR APPLICATION PROGRAM DEPLOYMENT - A communication system includes a development sector for registering a plurality of wireless devices, a business sector for controlling utilization of an application program and for receiving application data, a service sector for deploying the application program and for providing the application data to the business sector in accordance with communication with at least one wireless device of the plurality; and a mobile sector comprising the plurality of wireless devices, each device for receiving the application program deployed by the service sector, executing the application program in response to the business sector, and communicating with the service sector to support provision of the application data to the business sector. The wireless device, such as a cell phone, personal digital assistant, or palm top computer may include an auxiliary device such as a bar code scanner, a magnetic stripe card reader, or a printer. The business sector or service sector may monitor or limit utilization of the auxiliary device. Deployment of application programs may be controlled by the business sector or the development sector by rendering an application program or auxiliary device available for use only after a particular time or after receipt of a message. Distributed processing application programs having components in the business, service, and mobile sectors may thereby be updated in an orderly manner. An application program on a wireless device may assist confirmation of an order made by a buyer via a web site. The wireless device is expected to be operated by the buyer. Fraud reporting is accomplished by comparing data obtained by registration of the wireless device with data provided in the confirmation. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090047950 | REGISTRATION OF WIRELESS NODE - Various example embodiments are disclosed. According to one example, a method may include sending, by a wireless node, a registration request message, the registration request message including location-related information for the wireless node and a transmission power of the wireless node. The method may further include receiving a neighbor list message, the neighbor list message including a list of registered neighboring wireless nodes, the list indicating a spectral allocation for each registered neighboring wireless node. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090047951 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING LOCATION OF TERMINAL IN PACKET-SWITCHING DOMAIN - A method and apparatus for registering the location of a terminal in a PS domain in a mobile communication network are provided, in which the terminal transmits a request message requesting registration of the location of the terminal to an MME of the mobile communication network, receives from the MME a response message including an eMSC indicator indicating an eMSC connected to the MME from among a plurality of eMSCs, and registers the location of the terminal to the eMSC indicated by the eMSC indicator included in the response message if the eMSC indicator included in the response message is different from an eMSC indicator stored in the terminal. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090047952 | IDLE MODE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-ACCESS SYSTEM USING PMIP - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate enabling multiple address access between two or more networks. A home agent can update a binding cache with a particular proxy binding update (PBU) to include two or more network gateway IP addresses associated with a user equipment (UE) within two or more networks or systems. When the UE in idle mode moves between networks or systems to which registration has occurred, an attachment procedure is not performed since the home agent includes the network gateway IP addresses related to such UE. Thus, inter-system idle mode mobility is enabled without having to perform a full attachment, re-registration, or de-registration based on the network location of the UE. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090061868 | DECISIONMAKING FOR DYNAMIC LOCAL TIME UPDATES IN A PREPAID TERMINATING CALL - A method and system for setting a charging rate for a terminating call to a prepaid mobile subscriber in a telecommunications network is provided. A query from a GMSC to a mobile subscriber's HLR returns information from a VMSC where the mobile subscriber is registered, including local time information for the MSC where the mobile subscriber is registered. The local time information can be included in an Initial Detection Point at call setup so that a peak or off-peak rate for the call can be set. Additional messaging between the GMSC and the VMSC during the call can provide updated local time information which can be used to set a charge for each allocated charging segment of a call. The SCP can also determine that such additional messaging is not necessary if a mobile subscriber's initial location, local time, or direction of travel indicates that the call's peak or off-peak rating will not change during the call. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090061869 | Policy Based Mobile-IP Address Selection and Assignment - A method for imposing a communication policy for a mobile node. During Mobile-IP (MIP) registration for the mobile node, when a MIP home agent sends an access request to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server, the AAA server will select a pool of IP addresses corresponding with a communication policy for the mobile node and will direct the home agent to assign an IP address selected from that pool. Thereafter, when the home agent receives a communication to or from the IP address, the home agent may then determine the applicable communication policy by determining the pool from which the IP address was selected, and the home agent may apply that communication policy. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090088155 | WIRELESS CONTROL OF ACCESS POINTS - A method including wirelessly receiving a communication from a wireless device at a receiving device where the communication designated for transmission through the receiving device, recognizing a non-address portion of the communication as indicative of a command for the receiving device, and terminating the communication at the receiving device. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090093250 | SYSTEM FOR ALTERNATE COMMUNICATIONS IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Unified Messaging System (UMS) having a Session Border Controller (SBC) to receive a Session Initiation Protocol Uniform Resource Identifier (SIP URI), detect from a host portion of the SIP URI that the SIP URI is associated with a failover communication session, update a user portion of the SIP URI to indicate a failure disposition, and route the updated SIP URI to a call agent of the UMS. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090098871 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE REDIRECTION BACKGROUND - System and method are provided for redirecting a communication device between a macro network and a femtocell network using a service redirection message (SRDM). In an embodiment, the communication device registers with the network which then determines the subscription status of the communication device to a femtocell network. If the subscription is confirmed, using the SRDM the system redirects the communication device to a communication frequency used by the femtocell network. Upon receipt of the SRDM, the communication devices tunes to a communication frequency specified in the SRDM. The system may segregate the CDMA channels used by the macro network, one set containing channels exclusive to the macro network and the other containing channel or channels used by both the macro network and the femtocell network. In this way, the communication device is prevented from entering a frequency re-hashing loop. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090104906 | Logical connection establishment method for mobile terminal - A logical channel establishment method for a mobile terminal is provided for improving network connection possibility and connection reliability. A logical channel establishment method of the present invention includes transmitting a resource request message for establishing a logical connection to an unlicensed wireless access network via a base station; retransmitting, when a resource request rejection message is received or no response message is received before a timer expires, the resource request message after a retry timer expires; and repeating retransmission of the resource request message a threshold number of retransmission times until a logical connection is established. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090111467 | METHOD FOR REPORTING THE DEVICE CAPABILITY INFORMATION AND TERMINAL DEVICE - A method for reporting device capability information includes that the device capability information about a terminal device is stored in the terminal device based on a device management tree structure, and the device management tree recording the device capability information is managed by a device management server on a network. The terminal device inquires the device capability information that needs to be reported for operating the service from the device capability information stored based on the device management tree structure, and the inquired device capability information is reported to an application server providing the service to the terminal device. In the method, when the terminal device reports the stored device capability information to a service application server, a network server can manage and maintain the device capability information sets stored in each terminal device dynamically. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090117898 | Base Station and Mobile Station - Problems can be solved by a base station to which a location of a mobile station is registered and which performs a radio communication with the MS, and when receiving distribution information, divides the distribution information into N pieces, and incorporates the divided distribution information in N pieces of reception channels to successively transmit them to the MS. It can be achieved by a MS which is in a waiting state of a BS and which performs a radio communication with the BS, and when receiving distribution information which is incorporated in reception channels and divided, stores the distribution information, and when determining completion of the distribution of the distribution information, constructs the N pieces of divided information and displays it. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090124254 | Method and devices for supporting a flexible handling of connections towards a dual mode mobile station - The invention relates to a method and devices for supporting the use of a dual mode mobile station in a cellular telecommunications network connected to a first cellular telecommunications access network and a second short range and/or high bandwidth access network. The node connecting the second access network and the core network imitates a node of the cellular telecommunications access network towards a core network and operates towards the second access network like a SIP proxy. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090124255 | Communication Network System and Mobile Terminal - An identification-information extracting unit extracts first identification information of a location registration area of a wireless communication system. A storage unit stores correspondence information concerning a relationship between the first identification information and second identification information of a location registration area managed by a communication network system. A location-registration requesting unit transmits location-registration request information for requesting a location registering device to perform a new location registration when the second identification information is updated by a movement of a mobile terminal. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090124256 | ADDRESS REGISTRATION CONTROL DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique of, in a case in which an MN (Mobile Node) has a plurality of interfaces, enabling the control to prevent an infinite transfer loop on the MN side while making use of the plurality of interfaces as simultaneously as possible. According to this technique, when each of the plurality of interfaces of the MN ( | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090124257 | SCHEDULED GRANT HANDLING - The present invention relates to a network node and a method in a radio communications network for providing a radio interface between the radio base station and a mobile terminal, provided to assign transmission rates to the mobile terminal to be used in an uplink packet data channel from the mobile terminal to the radio base station. A receiver is provided to receive at least a first rate request from the mobile terminal requesting increased transmission rate, a measurement device is provided to measure the utilised transmission rate for the packet data transmission from the mobile terminal to the radio base station, and a message transmitter is provided to send a new grant message to the mobile terminal repeating the first transmission rate, if the measured transmission rate is lower than a first specified fraction of the assigned first transmission rate. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090131049 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF WITHIN AN IP-FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium for provisioning communication services by an IP-based femtocell network is provided. Service of a user equipment may be transferred from one femtocell to another femtocell via a femtocell handoff procedure. Femtocell systems of the femtocell network perform link quality measurements and may distribute the link quality measurements to neighbor femtocells. A femtocell system may periodically evaluate the link quality with the user equipment. If an evaluation is made that the user equipment needs to be transferred to another site, the servicing femtocell site may evaluate the most recent link quality measurements received from neighboring femtocell sites and select a femtocell site for handoff. In the event that the femtocell network is deployed in an area serviced by a macrocellular network, handoff routines may provide preference for transferring the user equipment to a target femtocell system rather than a macrocell site. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090131050 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR CONFIGURATION OF AN IP-FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for configuration of a femtocell system is provided. A femtocell system is provisioned with a default base station manager IP address. The base station manager receives an account identifier of a user subscription and a femtocell system ID assigned to the femtocell system. The base station manager may allocate a SID/NID for the femtocell system. A list of electronic serial numbers of handsets in the user subscription may be compiled by the base station manager. The femtocell system may connect with the base station manager and request a configuration download once deployed in a SOHO. The compiled electronic serial numbers may then be transferred from the base station manager to the femtocell system in a configuration download. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090131051 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING CONTROL OF CONTROL SIGNALING PERFORMED BY A MOBILE NODE OPERABLE IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatus ( | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090149177 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOCATION REGISTRATION PERIOD DEFINING NODE, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION - Even if the number of subscribers increases, such increased number of the subscribers can be handled by a mobile communication system without increasing the equipment of the system, so that the assignment of the radio resources should not be constrained due to excessive location registration. A MSC of a mobile communication system determines a location registration period for each of mobile terminals according to subscriber information retained by HLR or VLR. In this case, a relatively long location registration period is set for the mobile terminal incorporated into a vending machine and having a weak mobility, as compared to the mobile terminal that frequently moves. This eliminates the wasteful operation of performing the location registration in a uniform period with the mobile terminal that frequently moves, so as to avoid the situation in which the assignment of the radio resources are constrained. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090156208 | Local network access using public cells - Disclosed herein are apparatus, method, and computer program whereby a cellular network base station operates with closed subscriber group indicator indicating off. The cellular network base station transmits information to a user equipment indicating the availability of a local service area network at a location in which the user equipment is currently located. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090163205 | Wireless Communication After Subscriber Station Is Switched On - In a wireless communication system having at least first and second radio stations located at a network end and connected to a core network, the first radio station receives a registration message from a user station to initially register the user station in a radio station located at the network end, after the user station has been switched on. Subsequently, communication takes place between the core network and the user station. Signaling messages that are to be sent from the core network to the user station are transmitted, at least at the beginning of the communication between the core network and the user station, from the core network to the second radio station, then from the second radio station to the first radio station or another radio station located at the network end, and from the first radio station (or the other radio station) directly to the user station. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090170511 | GROUP NETWORK FORMING METHOD AND GROUP NETWORK SYSTEM - To allow mobile communication terminal apparatuses or a plurality of communication terminal apparatuses, which are connected to a network of the communication terminal apparatuses belonging to home electrical products or the like, to participate in a group network service; reduce the user's burdens in registering with the group network; and provide a secure group network service. In this communication terminal apparatus, when detecting the connection of a memory card ( | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090170512 | Maintaining IMS Registration While Disconnected from IP Bearer - user equipment while the user equipment is disconnected from the system. The user equipment connects to the proxy and establishes a proxy session with the proxy. The proxy opens a proxy session for the user equipment, establishes a registration within said IMS network for IMS services on behalf of the user equipment; and maintains the registration for the user equipment for the duration of the proxy session. While the proxy session is ongoing, the user equipment can disconnect from the IP proxy. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090170513 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND RESOURCE REQUEST METHOD - A mobile station includes an identifier selection unit selecting one identifier among identifiers supplied in advance when the mobile station initiates communications and a connection request signal generation unit generating a connection request signal including the identifier. A radio access network apparatus includes a response signal generation unit, in response to the connection request from the mobile station, generating a response signal including an identifier assigned by a radio access network system and information indicative of an uplink radio resource assigned for the mobile station and a transmission unit transmitting the response signal to the mobile station transmitting the connection request. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090181671 | VIRTUAL HOME NETWORK ARRANGEMENT FOR A SUBSCRIBER MODULE USING IMS - Systems, methods, and computer-readable media for managing end-to-end security over an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)-enabled network are provided. A first subscriber module accesses an IMS network via an access gateway as a roaming network. The roaming network routes a request for a session from the first subscriber module from its P-CSCF to the I-CSCF of a third-party home network. The third party home network, in turn, routes the request to an S-CSCF implemented at the subscriber's home network, which comprises a second subscriber module. In this way, the session between the two subscriber modules is managed by the subscriber's S-CSCF rather than by a carrier's IMS network, and the subscriber may administer the security relationship without reliance on the carrier or the third party. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090181672 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PAGING UTILIZING MULTIPLE TYPES OF NODE IDENTIFIERS - Paging load and/or registration load in a network is reduced by using different types of identifiers to specifying which nodes page an access terminal in the network. In some aspects, the network maintains a list that specifies that certain individual nodes (e.g., cells or sectors) are to page a given access terminal and/or that one or more zones (e.g., tracking areas) are to page the access terminal. In some aspects, an access terminal in a network may be configured to provide a forward-looking paging list to the network. The list provided by an access terminal may specify different types of node identifiers (e.g., individual node identifiers, subscriber groups, etc.). The network may then use the list to determine which nodes are to page a given access terminal such that when the access terminal moves to a different node, that node may already be configured to page the access terminal. In some aspect paging load and registration load are managed in a deployment that includes different types of access points. For example, access points of a first type (e.g., macro nodes) may provide service over relatively large coverage areas and access points of a second type (e.g., femto nodes) may provide service over smaller coverage areas and/or provide restricted service. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090191867 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING REGISTRATION MACROS IN AN IMS NETWORK-BASED DEVICE - Disclosed are a network-based device, method and computer-readable medium for providing registration macros in an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS). The method embodiment includes receiving an instruction from a user regarding a plurality of registration changes of customer Public User Identities at one or several pieces of equipment and implementing a macro such that the first step comprising at least one of a registration or de-registration and a second step comprising one of a registration or a de-registration both occur based on the instruction from the user. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090191868 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF REMOTELY DE-REGISTERING DEVICES IN IMS SYSTEM - Disclosed are a network-based device, method and computer-readable medium for operating a network device in an IP multimedia subsystem. The method embodiment includes receiving an instruction for a de-registration action for a Public User ID (PUID) registered at a device in the IMS, the instruction being initiated remotely from a device different from the device to which the de-registration applies and performing the de-registration action wherein the PUID is de-registered from the device in the IMS network. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090191869 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING A USER WITH A REGISTRATION REVIEW IN IMS SYSTEM - Disclosed are a network-based device, method and computer-readable medium for operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) to provide registration review. The method embodiment includes tracking and storing all current registrations for each user in an IMS system, receiving a request from a user for a status of the user's current registrations and presenting, in response to the request, the current status of current registrations for the user. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090191870 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING REGISTRATION ALERT IN AN IMS SYSTEM - Disclosed are network-based device, method and computer readable medium associated with an IP Multimedia Subsystem for providing registration alerts in the IMS system. The method embodiment includes detecting a predetermined event associated with a registration state associated with all of a user's registrations in the IMS and transmitting a notification to a user which reports the occurrence of the predetermined event. The method may also include taking an action relative to the user's registration state in the IMS system based on the user interaction with the notification. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090191871 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING IMS SERVICES TO USERS ON ORIGINATING NON IMS DEVICES AND OTHER DEVICES THAT DO NOT HAVE A PREVIOUS RELATIONSHIP WITH THE USER - Disclosed are a network-based device, method and computer readable medium for operating an IMS to provide IMS services to originating sessions from a device upon which the user is not registered. The method includes receiving communication from a user on a device upon which the user is not registered at a 2-stage dialing server, authenticating the user, determining a Public User ID (PUID) for the user, receiving an identification of a called party from the user, arranging for IMS services to be provided to the user on the device, sending an INVITE signal from the 2-stage dialing server on behalf of the user PUID to the called party and setting up the media connection from the device to the device associated with the called party. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090191872 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR OVER-THE-AIR ACTIVATION - A method and system automatically activates a mobile station in a wireless communications network. The system includes an over the air activation function (OTAF) processor in the network that initiates an activation process in response to receiving a registration message from a mobile switching center serving the mobile station requesting the activation. Each mobile station has a unit of information stored into it at the time of its manufacture to enable it to request over the air activation. That unit of information is either the network routing address of the OTAF processor, or alternately, it is a value that is translatable into that address, either an OTAF ID number that is the same value for every mobile station or it is a sequentially serialized dummy value for the mobile identification number (a dummy MIN). When the mobile station is turned on for the first time in the network, it requests activation over the air by transmitting to the local mobile switching center a registration order. The registration order will include one of the three alternative forms of the information unit described above, either the routing address of the OTAF processor, or the OTAF ID number, or a dummy MIN. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090203377 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, PILOT TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF, AND A TERMINAL APPARATUS - In conditions of low data traffic, such as during the night, when transmitting pilots in a downlink radio transmission zone, sub frames are divided into (1) first sub frames that transmit common pilots over a whole transmission band, and (2) second sub frames that transmit common pilots over a specified narrow band of a whole transmission band, where first sub frames are transmitted at a specified period, and second sub frames are transmitted for period of time except the specified period. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090215453 | Provision of public service identities - The present invention is aimed to provide a simplified mechanism to handle Public Service Identities identifying services in a network when a given Public Service Identity (PSI) belongs to a range of Public Service Identities defined as a so-called “Wildcard PSI” range. Therefore, the present invention provides a new method, a new central entity in the network, and enhanced Home Subscriber Server, serving entity, and routing entity, all co-operating to carry out different embodiments for the invention by handling an identifier of the Λ Wildcard PSI’ range, which includes the given Public Service Identity, the Λ wildcard PSI’ range being associated with a common service profile to be applied for services identified by those Public Service Identities belonging to the “Wildcard PSI” range. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090215454 | Method and Apparatus for use in a Communications Network - A method and apparatus for registering a mobile node such as a User Equipment (UE) of a UMTS telecommunications network with a subsystem of the network such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). A Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) node provides policy and charging rules, and a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) enforces the rules for traffic flows. The UE sends a registration request to the GGSN, which selects a PCRF. When a Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF) receives the registration request, the P-CSCF selects a candidate PCRF and validates the selection. If the candidate PCRF is the PCRF selected by the GGSN, the registration is successful. If not, the P-CSCF may select another PCRF and repeat the validation process. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090215455 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING THE TRANSMISSION RESOURCES BY LOCAL LOOPBACK IN A MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION CELLULAR NETWORK, NETWORK AND LOCAL ADAPTERS THEREOF - A method for transmitting data in a mobile radio communication cellular network, wherein setting up, maintaining and terminating a data communication channel between a caller and a called party located in the cellular network are implemented by the exchanges of signalling messages. A caller and/or a called party each is located in a local zone of the cellular network. The method includes: a first detecting phase if the caller and the called party of the communication are located in the same local zone of the cellular network, according to a detection strategy including a step of analysing all or a portion of the signalling messages; and then triggering a local loopback operation of all or a portion of the data exchanged between the caller and the called party, in the case where the detecting phase confirms the local nature of the communication between the caller and the called party. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090215456 | METHOD FOR SENDING RLC PDU AND ALLOCATING RADIO RESOURCE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RLC ENTITY OF MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed is a transmission of a RLC STATUS PDU using a limited radio resource by MAC and RLC layers in a long term evolution (LTE) system. In case where the MAC entity prioritizes logical channels for allocating the radio resource to each logical channel, the MAC entity is allowed to allocate radio resources based upon the size of a RLC STATUS PDU to be sent from the RLC layer and also the RLC layer is allowed to use the STATUS PDU prior to RLC data PDUs upon using the allocated radio resource, such that RLC protocols can be avoided from coming in a deadlock situation due to a non-transmission of the STATUS PDU. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090215457 | Dynamic Cellular Cognitive System - High quality communications among a diverse set of cognitive radio (CR) nodes is permitted while minimizing interference to primary and other secondary users by employing Dynamic Spectrum Access (DSA) in a Dynamic Cellular Cognitive System (DCCS). Diverse device types interoperate, cooperate, and communicate with high spectrum efficiency and do not require infrastructure to form the network. The dynamic cellular cognitive system can expand to a wider geographical distribution via linking to existing infrastructure. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090215458 | MESSAGE TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for transmitting messages to alter the operating status between a mobile station and a base station in a wireless access system comprises, at the mobile station, transmitting a first message to the base station, setting a first count to a first predetermined value and enabling a first, the first message requesting a alteration in operating status between the mobile station and the base station, whereupon expiration of the first timer before receiving a second message from the base station, the count is decremented and, if the count is above a second predetermined value, the first timer is reset and the first message is retransmitted to the base station. The method also comprises, at a base station, receiving the first message, transmitting a second message to the mobile station and enabling a second timer, whereupon expiration of the second timer, the alteration in operating status is effected. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090221289 | DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION SIGNALING OVER AN UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate signaling and detecting discontinuous transmission (DTX) in a wireless communication environment. A DTX indicator and Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) feedback can be multiplexed within a common uplink control channel subframe and transmitted to a base station when the access terminal is operating in DTX mode for an Acknowledgement Channel. Further, when operating in non-DTX mode, the access terminal can multiplex an ACK indicator or a NAK indicator with the CQI feedback within a common uplink control channel subframe, which can thereafter be transferred to the base station. Accordingly, the base station can detect DTX operation or non-DTX operation of the access terminal. For example, reference signal symbols can carry one of the DTX indicator, the ACK indicator, or the NAK indicator. Pursuant to another example, the CQI feedback and the DTX indicator can be combined and carried jointly by non-reference signal symbols. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090233599 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mobile communication network comprising a plurality of base stations and a plurality of mobile machines, the unit for supplying particular location information assigned to a predetermined particular area in advance to the mobile machines moving in the particular area and the mobile machines conduct location registration to the base station side by using the particular location information at a time when the mobile machine enters in the particular area, thereby, increase of load on a network and of power consumption, and quality deteriorations of transmission paths, due to location registration when many users carrying the mobile machines move on a train or the like can be prevented. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090239534 | APPARATUS AND A SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING PROFILE INFORMATION OF A TERMINAL - An apparatus and system for registering profile information of a terminal in a network is provided. A profile information agent includes a receiver which receives a profile information transmission request message containing profile information associated with a terminal and a transmitter which transmits a profile information registration request message to a profile information server, the profile information registration request message including the profile information. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090253431 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR REALIZING USER IDENTITY ASSOCIATION - The present invention discloses a method for realizing user identity association, the method comprising: setting an equivalent behavior user identifier in a Home Subscription Server (HSS); associating IMS Public User Identities (IMPUs) with the equivalent behavior through the set equivalent behavior user identifier. The present invention also discloses a system and a device realizing user identity association. According to the embodiments of the present invention, the association of the IMPUs with the set equivalent behavior is realized, which improves the user experiences. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090258647 | MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCY BAND MAPPING METHOD, LOCATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, PAGING METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE SAME AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method for mapping an operating frequency band of a mobile station device in a mobile communication system, an operating frequency band position at the time of idle mode of respective mobile station devices is arranged so as to be distributed throughout a unique frequency bandwidth of a base station device. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090258648 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PROVIDING INNER-CELL REGISTRATION OF ACCESS TERMINAL IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatus, and an associated method, for controlling generation of a registration message by an access terminal to register the access terminal with an access network. A configuration message broadcast by an access network station indicates if the network station is inner-cell-enabled capable and includes a value of a selected threshold, such as a minimum value of a pilot signal strength. The access terminal detects the configuration message and delays sending a registration message until signals received by the access terminal are of characteristics at least as great as the selected threshold. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090264126 | Method and Apparatus for Support of Closed Subscriber Group Services in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. Some embodiments provides a method of user equipment registration with a closed subscriber group (CSG) where a network controller receives a registration request for a UE from an access point including an initial non-access stratum (NAS) message from the user equipment and a CSG identifier (CSG-ID). The network controller forwards the NAS and CSG-ID the core network. The method receives, at the network controller, a permanent identifier from the core network and completing registration. The method uses the permanent identity of the UE to complete the ULE registration. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090270097 | Method and Apparatus for User Equipment Registration Updates Triggered by a Tracking Area Change - Some embodiments provide a method for updating registration information of a user equipment (UE) in a communication system that includes several evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRANs) that communicatively couple the UE to a Voice over long term evolution (LTE) via Generic Access (VoLGA) network controller (VANC). The method receives a message at the UE from the VANC including a list of E-UTRAN tracking areas (TAs) served by the VANC, each tracking area identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI). The method stores the list of E-UTRAN tracking areas at the UE. The method sends a register update message that includes a TAI of a particular E-UTRAN tracking area from the UE to the VANC when the UE moves into the particular E-UTRAN tracking area and the particular E-UTRAN TAI is not in the list of E-UTRAN tracking areas (TAs) served by the VANC. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090270098 | Method and Apparatus for User Equipment Registration in a Voice over Long Term Evolution via Generic Access - Some embodiments of the present invention provide a method for UE registration for VoLGA services. The method sends a register request message from the UE to the VANC to register the UE with the VANC. The register request message includes location information that identifies an EPS cell upon which the UE has camped. The method receives a register response message at the UE from the VANC. The register response message indicates whether the UE is permitted to access services of the VANC. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090270099 | Method and Apparatus for Network Controller Selection in a Voice over Long Term Evolution via Generic Access System - Some embodiments provide a method of associating Mobile Management Entities (MMEs) of an evolved packet system (EPS) and Voice over long term evolution (LTE) via Generic Access (VoLGA) network controllers (VANCs). The method includes at a serving VANC, receiving a registration message from a user equipment (UE). The registration message includes an assigned Globally Unique Temporary Identity (GUTI) of the UE and the serving VANC is provisioned with MME-to-VANC mapping information. The VANC extracts an identification of a MME from the GUTI determines an associated VANC based on the provisioned MME-to-VANC mapping information. The VANC then sends a message from the serving VANC to the associated VANC, the message indicating that the serving VANC is now serving the UE. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090275331 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING MOBILE DATA DEVICES - An intermediate system ( | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090280807 | Base-Station Apparatus, Mobile Communication System, Wireless Communication Method, And Computer Program Product - A base-station apparatus is connected to an HLR via a core network, and wirelessly communicates with mobile terminals in a cell. The base-station apparatus includes a transmission controller that controls transmission of different area identifiers. For example, an area identifier “ | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090286538 | Method for digitally drawing numbers - A method is disclosed for essentially making the drawing of numbers, for the organization of individuals who are waiting, significantly more flexible without loss of functionality. In at least one embodiment of the method, each of those waiting individuals registers themselves with a number-drawing server using a mobile telephone, specifying a unique identification number and a queuing destination. The mobile telephone of each of those waiting then communicates to the number-drawing server, at certain intervals, its current position and requests from the number-drawing server a current-status update. The number-drawing computer then determines from the waiting individuals current position whether this is geographically at such a distance that this individual has any possibility of meeting the next appointment time, and that if he is geographically too far away, others who are waiting are brought forward in the waiting queue. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090286539 | Apparatus and Method for Cell Reselection in a Radio Access Network - A method for cell reselection from a serving cell to another cell in a radio access network covering a geographical area divided into a plurality of cells, the method comprising: attempting to reselect to a first other cell with a higher rank value than the serving cell; setting up a channel on the first other cell and initiating a completion period; conditional on the completion period expiring before the first other cell is identified as being a suitable cell, receiving cell measurements for cells and creating a cell ranking list of the cells based on rank values of the cells; conditional on a second other cell having a higher rank value than the serving cell or first other cell, attempting to reselect to the second other cell. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090286540 | FEMTOCELL ARCHITECTURE FOR INFORMATION MANAGEMENT - A system and methodology that significantly reduces traffic in a backhaul pipe of a femto access point (AP) and organizes content delivery is provided. Specifically, an aggregator/routing platform is employed to connect multiple femto APs in a femto enterprise to a single backhaul network. The aggregator/routing platform collects and analyzes information from the multiple femtos and directly route communication packets to between femto APs within the enterprise when possible, without employing the backhaul network. Content and/or tasks can be internally organized between devices connected to the multiple femtos, without accessing the core network. During internal communication, a control link can preserved and sent to the core network to facilitate billing. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090291684 | NETWORK ACCESS USING NETWORK IDENTIFICATION - A network system that identifies a home network of a user by a network identification in an access request. When the access request is received in a network, the accessed network extracts a network identification from the access request and determines whether the access request is received from a subscriber or non-subscriber. If a non-subscriber, then a foreign network is identified and a network identification database is consulted to retrieve contact information for the foreign network. If the contact information is successfully retrieved, then the user may be routed to the foreign network (home network of the user). Otherwise (if the contact information is not in the network identification database), the user may be denied any access, and a purchase agreement for connect services may be offered. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090298499 | MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE SYSTEM AND METHOD USING PUBLIC FREQUENCY - Mobile telecommunication service system and method using a public frequency are provided. The method includes receiving a call connection request for a certain recipient from a mobile communication terminal; and connecting a radio interval between the mobile communication terminal and a Base station Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) of a call connection interval of the mobile communication terminal and the certain recipient, using a public frequency band. Accordingly, it is possible to stably connect the call to the public institution in case of the emergency or the public operation. By raising the utilization of the limited frequency resources, the insufficient frequency in the private mobile telecommunication can be addressed. The public institutions provide the public frequency to the private telecommunication companies and use the mobile communication service for free or at a low cost in return. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090298500 | METHOD FOR REGISTERING A COMUNICATIONS DEVICE, AND AN ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND REGISTRATION UNIT - To register a communications device (UE | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090305700 | Optimizing the Connection Between a Mobile Communication Terminal and a Signaling Server Through an Address Translation Device - A mobile communication terminal (T) comprising connection means (M | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090305701 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PCC ENHANCEMENT FOR FLOW BASED MOBILITY - Systems and methods are described that facilitate multiple registrations and flow based mobility in a wireless communication network. A flow routing component can be included in a mobile device, home agent/p-gateway, or a policy and charging rules function server that determines the manner in which to route one or more IP flows through a set of network access entry points. The flow routing component can determine the routing based on a set of policies and/or network data, such as quality of service requirements, bandwidth requirements, network congestion, currently active IP flows, and so forth. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090312018 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Data is transmitted from a radio communication device ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090318146 | SETTING INFORMATION REGISTRATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SETTING INFORMATION REGISTRATION METHOD, AND SETTING INFORMATION REGISTRATION PROGRAM - The present invention provides a setting information registration apparatus that can prevent unnecessary setting information from being generated, when setting information needed at the time of performing wireless communication is generated. A setting information registration apparatus ( | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090318147 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR STORING ADDRESS OF NETWORK ANCHOR POINT TO NETWORK SERVER - A method for storing an address of a network anchor point to a network server is provided The provided method includes the following steps: a terminal initiates an attach request or a bearer establishment request, and a network selects a network anchor point; and when the network anchor point assigns a first bearer context to the terminal, or a first connection is established between the network anchor point and the terminal, the network registers an address of the network anchor point to a network server. A method for deleting an address of a network anchor point from a network server is also provided, which includes the following steps: when a terminal or an entity in a network initiates a delete bearer request, the network instructs a network server to delete an address of a network anchor point that has been registered to the network server if the network anchor point no longer serves the terminal; and the network server deregisters the address of the network anchor point. A communication system is further provided. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20100003978 | Apparatus and Method For Improving Mobile Terminated Cell Setup Performance During Inter-Frequency Cell Reselection - An apparatus and method comprising determining if the timing of a registration system information (RSI) or a paging occasion occurs first; if the paging occasion occurs first, checking for a page and answering the page on the target cell after collecting system information (SI) if the page exists; or if the timing of the RSI occurs first: reading RSI and obtaining a registration area indicator of the target cell; determining if the registration area indicators of a source cell and of the target cell are the same; if not, determining whether checking the page in the source cell would overlap with receiving SI from the target cell; if overlap, or if same, collect SI and monitor a paging channel in the target cell; or if no overlap, checking for the page in the source cell, and if no page, collect SI and monitor the paging channel in the target cell. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100009681 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSTANCE IDENTIFIER BASED ON A UNIQUE DEVICE IDENTIFIER - A method and apparatus for use in a communications network whereby an Instance Identifier (ID) is created to uniquely identify a device such as a mobile device or User Equipment (UE) in the communications network. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100015975 | PROFILE SERVICE FOR SHARING RIGHTS-ENABLED MOBILE PROFILES - A system and method are provided for sharing rights-enabled user profiles among users in voice communication system, such as a mobile telecommunications system. In general, each user defines a user profile and associated access rights, where the user profile and access rights are stored by or accessible to a profile service. When a voice session, or call, is initiated between a first and second user, a device of the first user requests a profile of the second user from the profile service. In response, the profile service determines whether the first user has been granted access rights to the user profile of the second user. If so, the profile service provides the user profile of the second user, or a portion thereof, to the device of the first user according to the access rights of the first user, and the user profile is presented to the first user. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100015976 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING RIGHTS-ENABLED MOBILE PROFILES - A system and method are provided for sharing rights-enabled user profiles among users in voice communication system, such as a mobile telecommunications system. In general, each user defines a user profile and associated access rights, where the user profile and access rights are stored by or accessible to a profile service. When a voice session, or call, is initiated between a first and second user, a device of the first user requests a profile of the second user from the profile service. In response, the profile service determines whether the first user has been granted access rights to the user profile of the second user. If so, the profile service provides the user profile of the second user, or a portion thereof, to the device of the first user according to the access rights of the first user, and the user profile is presented to the first user. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100015977 | METHOD FOR BUILDING NEIGHBORING CELLS LISTS IN CELLULAR RADIOCOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method for defining lists of neighboring cells of a cellular radiocommunications network, includes: obtaining a description of mobility paths followed by users of mobile communications terminals in a geographic area of interest; and including a first cell in the list of neighboring cell of a second cell in case, based on the mobility paths' description, to ascertain that there is a mobility path joining the first and the second cells. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100022240 | Requesting a user account for services - An automated network registration and activation system and method of the present invention automatically configures a communication network device for communicating on a network and automatically handles the communication network registration and activation. In one embodiment a processor automatically configures a device for communicating on a communication network with automated registration and activation on the communication network. In one exemplary implementation, network configuration information includes a network unit device identifier (e.g., a MAN) and the present invention automatically registers and activates a device with a communication network when requested to activate by a user tapping on an activation application or being taken to the activation application. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100035612 | Mobile Communication System and Related Management Method - The present invention discloses a mobile communications system, which includes a mobile communication device and a server device. The mobile communication device includes a first reception module for obtaining device information corresponding to the mobile communication device and a transmission module for transmitting the device information via a mobile communication network. The server device includes a second reception module for receiving the device information via the mobile communication network and a connection module for establishing a communication connection between the mobile communication device and a destination end according to the device information when a communication request corresponding to the mobile communication device is received from the destination end. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100035613 | Method of Selecting a Network by a Mobile Apparatus - A method is provided for selecting an available network ( | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100041402 | Method and Apparatus for Distributing Temporary ID/Permanent ID Relationships in Enterprise Home Node B System - A method of distributing user equipment identifiers in a communication system that includes a first wireless communications system that has a core network and a second wireless communications system that includes several short range access points using licensed wireless frequencies and a network controller for communicatively coupling a user equipment to the core network. The method sends a temporary identifier of the UE that is allocated by the core network to a first access point. The UE is registered on the first access point. The method receives a register update message from the first access point. The register update message includes a permanent identifier of the UE, a previous temporary identifier of the UE, and the temporary identifier. The method sends a register update message from the network controller to a second access point to cause the second access point to update the previous temporary identifier with the temporary identifier. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100041403 | Method and Apparatus for Management of UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifiers (U-RNTIs) over the Iuh Interface - A method of managing user equipment (UE) identifiers in a communication system that includes a first wireless communications system that has a core network and a second wireless communications system that includes several short range access points using licensed wireless frequencies and a network controller for communicatively coupling a user equipment to the core network. The method receives a radio resource control (RRC) connection request message from the UE. The method allocates a first identifier to the UE. The method sends an RRC connection setup message that includes the first identifier from the access point to the UE. The method sends a connection management services request message and the first identifier. The network controller determines the first identifier is in use. The method sends a mobility info message that includes a second identifier which is different than the first identifier from the access point to the UE. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100056142 | Telephony System - A telephony system includes a base station and a registration station in communication with the base station. The registration station further includes a base station transceiver for communicating with the base station using a first telecommunications standard, a handset transceiver for communicating with handsets in the vicinity of the registration station, and a registration program that automatically registers handsets in the vicinity of the registration station using a second wireless telecommunications standard. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100056143 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SERVICE REGISTRATION IN A MULTI MODE PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for service registration in a multi mode portable terminal are provided. The apparatus includes a system registration manager for, if a rejection corresponding to service disability is generated during a registration process with a first network, processing to reboot the multi mode portable terminal. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100056144 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TELEPHONE EXCHANGE IN FEMTOCELL NETWORKS - The present application describes methods for performing proxy communications between mobile stations connected to a femtocell network and a central telephone network controlled by a network operator. In some embodiments, a private branch exchange is configured to temporarily assign identification numbers to the mobile stations connected to the femtocell network. Incoming calls are directed to the private branch exchange rather than the connected mobile stations. After receiving the incoming call, the private branch exchange routes the incoming call to the correct mobile station. In some embodiments, these methods also enable mobile stations to cross between femtocell coverage areas within the same femtocell network without constantly updating the central network operator. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100062766 | DIGITAL ENHANCED CORDLESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS (DECT) METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONY SELF INSTALL - A self-install model for installing digital telephony services at a user premises uses a Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication (“DECT”) system having a base station and a cordless telephone. The self-install model enables the activation of telephony services at the user premises automatically through an Internet Protocol network of a service provider such that the user is able to make and receive calls at the user premises over a communication network upon activation of the telephony services. The self-install model involves pre-tests to ensure signal strength of the connection between the user premises and the communication network; acceptance by the user to the service provider's terms and conditions for providing the telephony services to the user premises by way of messages from the service provider being displayed on the cordless handset; activation of the telephony services by the service provider; and post-install service verification tests. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100062767 | METHOD FOR RE-ASSIGNMENT OF S-CSCF SERVICES TO REGISTERED IMS USERS OF A HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVERS HSS - Re-assigning Serving Call Session Control Function, S-CSCF, services to a user of a Home Subscriber Server, HSS ( | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100062768 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Service Area Identifier for a User Equipment in a Wireless System - The present invention relates to a method for allocating service area identifiers (SAI) for a femto cell ( | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100069067 | TICKET-BASED CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS VALIDATION - Aspects describe spectrum authorization, access control, and configuration parameters validation. Devices in an ad-hoc or peer-to-peer configuration can utilize a licensed spectrum if the devices are authorized to use the spectrum, which can be determined automatically. Aspects relate to distribution of authorization tickets by an authorization server as a result of validating a device's credentials and services to which the device is entitled. An exchange and verification of authorization tickets can be performed by devices as a condition for enabling a validated wireless link using the spectrum. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100069068 | System And Methods For Data Communications In A Wireless Communication System - In one embodiment, a mobile communication device is configured to selectively enable user data communications after registration in a wireless communication network. The mobile device sends, via its radio, feature compliance information to the network. In response to the feature compliance information being sent, the mobile device receives, via the radio, configuration information which is derived based on the feature compliance information and location information of the mobile device. The mobile device then selectively enables the user data communications based on the received configuration information. In particular, the mobile device enables the user data communications when the location information indicates that the mobile device is operating in a particular country and the feature compliance information indicates feature compliance for the particular country. On the other hand, the mobile device disables the user data communications when the location information indicates that the mobile device is operating in the particular country and the feature compliance information indicates a lack of feature compliance for the particular country. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100075673 | Methods and Systems for Aggregating Presence Information to Provide a Simplified Unified Presence - Methods and systems for providing simplified presence for a user are described. The user has a plurality of associated communication devices registered with a communications server, and each communication device enables at least one communication service class. The server has a user data entry associating the user with each of the plurality of communication devices. To hide the details of the user-associated devices from third parties, a virtual device is defined and associated with the user. Presence information received at the server from the various devices is aggregated together to create aggregated presence information that indicates at least the service classes available from the user-associated devices based on the received presence information. A virtual device presence document is generated containing the aggregated presence information and is provided to a presence server as presence information associated with the user. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100081434 | REJECTION NOTIFICATION TO THE UICC - The innovation relates to a system and/or methodology for reporting registration rejections to the UICC. More specifically, the innovation relates to providing remote access to registration rejection data stored in the UICC, transmitting the registration rejection data to a service provider, executing one or more UICC applications based on the registration rejection data, and/or logging or tracking the registration rejection data. In addition, the innovation provides for automating action taken by the UICC based on the registration rejection using artificial intelligence. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100081435 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING ATTACH PROCEDURE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A service network for handling abnormal interrupts, including tracking area updates, lower layer failures, and guard timer expiries, during an attach procedure with a user equipment is provided. The service network includes a radio access network and a control node. When the radio access network detecting an abnormal interrupt, the control node aborts the attach procedure by sending a detach request message, via the radio access network, to the user equipment. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100081436 | Wireless Communication System, Session Reference Network Controller, and Session Reference Network Control Method - In a conventional system, there is a possibility that human errors are generated in setting registration information because a maintenance engineer manually enters registration information into a session reference network controller which integrally controls access terminals and base stations. To improve the system, session reference network controller a session reference network controller stores the number of access terminals, N, in advance. And, when a “base distance” setting request is received from an access terminal via a base station, the session reference network controller or an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) server determines a base station, which is one of a plurality of controlled base stations and is Nth nearest from the base station that has transmitted the setting request, and sets the distance between the base station, which has transmitted the setting request, and the base station, which is Nth nearest, as the “base distance”. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100081437 | Method, System and Device for Performing a Registration Procedure of a Mobile Terminal Device in A Mobile Communications Network - A method, system and device are provided for carrying out a login procedure of a mobile terminal into a mobile communications network. To compensate for a time delay on the communications channel between a base station and a control unit, a device is inserted into the connection between the base station and the control unit. The device is arranged between the base station and the section which is subject to time delay in the communications channel. The device stores the query reference broadcast by the mobile terminal device during each initiation of a login procedure and replaces the query reference in the reply with the query reference currently stored in this device. Thus, the mobile terminal device can carry out the login procedure even in the presence of time delays on the connection between the base station and the control unit. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100087193 | METHOD OF OPERATING A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a communication system is provided. The communication system comprises a NetWork (NW) and User Equipment (UE), a Non Access Stratum (NAS) via which the NW and UE communicate with each other, and an Access Stratum (AS) providing a physical connection to enable the NAS communication between the NW and UE to be achieved, the physical connection including a wireless radio link to the UE. The method includes sending information from the NW to the UE to determine at least one action of the UE in response to a failure of a radio link to the UE, detecting a Radio Link Failure (RLF), in response to the detecting of the RLF, deciding on an action to be performed by the UE according to the received information, and performing, by the UE, the decided action. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100093346 | SESSION UPDATE USING MANAGEMENT OF CAPABILITY OF TERMINAL - Management of capability information is disclosed. A server in a network acquires information about capability of a user equipment (or terminal) and manages the information in a centralized manner, to reduce signaling through a radio interface between user equipments to thus reduce a waste of radio resources. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100093347 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING INITIAL RANGING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of enabling a mobile station to perform initialization to a base station in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes synchronizing with the base station, obtaining an uplink parameter based on the synchronization, performing initial ranging by using the uplink parameter and establishing security association between the mobile station and the base station while performing the initial ranging. During the initial ranging, a mobile station's unique identifier or control signaling can securely be transmitted. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100093348 | PORTABLE TERMINAL DEVICE INITIALIZING METHOD - To provide an initialization method that enables a portable terminal device to be initialized with a remote operation even if an insertable/removable user information storing unit is replaced with one possessed by a third party in the portable terminal device that performs an incoming/outgoing operation on the basis of identification information registered to the user information storing unit, a communication system includes a portable terminal device that obtains first identification information and second identification information from a user information history storing unit and notifies a switch of the obtained information, and a switch that searches for the second identification information in an initialization target storing unit, and instructs the portable terminal device into which the user information storing unit to which the first identification information is registered is inserted to initialize data upon detection of the second identification information. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100099410 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING EVENTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DETECTION OF WIRELESS DEVICES - The disclosed embodiments provide a system and method for managing events associated with the detection of wireless devices. The disclosed embodiments utilize a residential wireless access point for detecting the signal transmitted by a wireless device. A user configures a wireless device detection program to perform specified events in response to the detection and/or absence of a wireless device. The disclosed embodiments may provide home automation functions, home security functions, and/or provide child monitoring features. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100099411 | METHOD FOR CATEGORIZATION OF MULTIPLE PROVIDERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SERVICE ENVIRONMENT - A communication device locates a preferable wireless service provider in a multi-service provider environment using a frequency band search schedule. Initially, the communications device registers with a less preferred service provider in a first frequency band. While remaining registered with the less preferred service provider, the device examines several frequency bands in the order specified by the frequency band search schedule. A frequency band is examined by dividing the frequency band into many sub-bands, and by locating the strongest signal above a threshold within the sub-band being examined. The examination continues until a second frequency band having a more preferred service provider is located. The communication device then registers with the more preferred service provider. The category of service provider may be identified and displayed on the communication device. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100105384 | LOCATION ROUTING AREA UPDATE PROCEDURES FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for instigating a location/routing area update procedure (LAU/RAU) when a piece of user equipment (UE) reselects its communication base station from a macro base station to a shorter range base station positioned within a macro cell of the macro base station is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of establishing a radio resource control connection between the UE and the shorter range base station; registering the UE with the shorter range base station; assigning location area code data (LAC) and routing area code data (RAC) from the shorter range base station to the UE; wherein the LAC and RAC data are the same data as the LAC and RAC data provided to the UE by the macro cell base station, whereby the UE does not perform a LAU/RAU procedure when it moves out of range of the shorter range base station and recommences communication with the macro base station. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100105385 | NETWORK REGISTRATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SERVER - A network registration method according to the present invention includes the steps of (A) transmitting, from a mobile station (UE), an attach request; (B) notifying, at a subscriber information management server (HSS), a switching apparatus of external network identification information which is identification information of an external network associated with the mobile station (UE) having transmitted the attach request; (C) setting up, at the switching apparatus, a bearer between a gateway apparatus and the mobile station on the basis of the notified external network identification information; (D) allocating, at the gateway apparatus, address information with which the mobile station connects to the external network, to the mobile station; and (E) notifying, at the switching apparatus, the external network identification information and the address information, to the mobile station (UE). | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100105386 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING OLD NETWORK THROUGH TEMPORARY ID OF EVLOVED NETWORK - A method for accessing an old network through a temporary ID of an evolved network includes these steps: a User Equipment (UE) adds Mobility Management Entity (MME) information for uniquely identifying an MME accessed by the UE on an evolved network to an access message sent to an old network when the UE accesses the old network through a temporary ID of the evolved network; and the old network selects a corresponding Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) for the UE according to the access message. After the MME information for uniquely identifying an MME is added to the access message sent to the old network, the old network can determine and find the MME that is accessed by the UE in the evolved network without changing a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and an SGSN on the old network. In addition, with the method for accessing the evolved network through a temporary ID of the old network, a combined SGSN/MME can be accessed to prevent unnecessary node relocation. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100120424 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTING THE SIZE OF A CONTROL REGION OF A DOWNLINK SUBFRAME - Disclosed herein are systems and methods for choosing the size of the control region of a downlink subframe. For example, an apparatus for selecting the size of the control region based on a set of one or more physical downlink control channels (PDCCHs) is disclosed. The apparatus, in some embodiments, includes: a module configured to determine, for each of at least two or more control region sizes included in a set of two or more control region sizes, a subset of PDCCHs from said set of PDCCHs that can be assigned to a control region having a size equal to the control region size; and control region size selector for selecting a control region size for the subframe, wherein the control region size selector is configured to make the selection based, at least in part, on information pertaining to the subset of PDCCHs that can be assigned to a control region having a size equal to the selected control region size. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100120425 | Method For Indicating A UE That It Must Register - The invention proposes a method for controlling a network, wherein the networks offers services to registered users, the method comprising the steps of receiving (A | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100120426 | OPTIMIZED SIGNALING OF PRIMARY SCRAMBLING CODES AND FREQUENCY LISTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate communicating PSC split information regarding neighboring cells. The PSC split information can be transmitted in one or more overhead messages selected based on network deployment. Where macro cells and femto cells provide PSC split information, which can be a PSC range for related cells, PSC list, etc., the information can be transmitted in a low priority overhead message since it can be obtained at a source cell. Where only femto cells or closed subscriber group (CSG) cells provide PSC split information, the information can be transmitted in a higher priority more frequently transmitted message. In this regard, the information is available at target cells since not all devices can access CSG cells. Thus, by providing the PSC split information in a more frequently transmitted message, devices can retrieve the PSC split information early on in communications to lower power consumption. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100120427 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DUAL REGISTRATION PROCESSING - A dual registration management method is provided. The method involves the home subscriber server HSS saving the access entity information for the user equipment UE to register in at least two networks. When the ISR is not active and when the UE accesses the access entity of RAT1 from the access entity of RAT2, the access entity of RAT1 does not initiate the location update procedure to the HSS if the access entity of RAT1 is the one in which the UE has registered before. Using this method, no matter whether the ISR of the network is active or not, if only the RAT entity saved in the HSS is not changed, the entity for the UE to access does not need to initiate the procedure to update location to the HSS, and the HSS also does not need to initiate the procedure to cancel location so the signaling load is saved. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100120428 | WIRELESS SERVICES OVER DIFFERENT CARRIER NETWORKS - A system and method for providing wireless services comprises a server configured to communicate over a plurality of different carrier networks with a plurality of mobile devices and to provide wireless services from a service provider to the plurality of mobile devices. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100124925 | Network search method and system for mobile station - A system and method for a network search by a mobile station enable the mobile station to reduce power consumption by performing a local network search on the basis of a system information message from a mobile communication network. The network search method in a wireless communication system includes: broadcasting, by a mobile communication network, a system information message containing information regarding the presence of a local network (access point information); and performing, after reception of the system information message, by a mobile station, network search for a local network according to the access point information. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100130203 | Method For Exchanging Cell Information Between Networks - A controller, such as a base station or radio network controller, for a local cellular network or network segment comprising one or more local cells being served by at least one transceiver, the controller communicating with the local cell or cells and comprising controlling means for controlling said local cell or cells and register means for register and share information about the local cell or cells and their relationships and also register and share information about one or more external cells within at least one external cellular network or network segment and their relationships with the local cell or cells. The controller in particular comprises communication means for communicating directly with one or more neighbouring controllers for the external cellular network or network segment, for sharing of the registered information about cells and their relationships. The present invention also relates to a method for said controller and a cellular network including said controller. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100130204 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND EXCHANGE - An object of the present invention is to avoid congestion, by restricting only processing which causes the congestion without affecting processing which essentially should not be restricted. In a mobile communication system according to the present invention, an exchange MSC/SGSN includes: a congestion factor detector configured to detect a congestion occurrence factor in the switching exchange MSC/SGSN, and a restriction indication transmitter configured to transmit, a restriction indication, to a radio network controller, based on the detected congestion occurrence factor, the restriction indication instructing a processing type that should be restricted in the switching exchange MSC/SGSN congestion occurrence factor. The radio network controller RNC is provided with a broadcast information transmitter configured to transmit broadcast information including the received restriction indication to a mobile station UE. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100136970 | DEVICE REGISTRATION IN AN IMS NETWORK - A network element for use in an IMS network is disclosed herein. The network element includes a communication interface operable to receive a SIP request message from a communication device, such as an SIP invite. The network element also includes a communication processor operable to process the SIP request message, extract registration information from a header of the SIP request message, and update a registration of the communication device with the IMS network based on the registration information. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100136971 | Usage of MSISDN in Subscription Assignment - The present invention relates to a method and device for activating a subscription in a cellular network comprising a register unit for a cellular network, said register unit storing at least one unique identity number which identifies a subscriber identity module. The stored identity number is registered in a cellular network subscription. The method is further characterized in the steps of: the register unit receiving the unique identity number for a subscriber identity module when the module is activated, and the register further assigning an authentication number with the received identity number—so that it defines the registered subscription. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100144349 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING COMPLETION OF NETWORK RE-ENTRY PROCEDURE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for receiving a notification indicating a completion of a network re-entry procedure by a Base Station (BS) in a communication system. The method includes transmitting, to a Mobile Station (MS), a RaNGing ReSPonse (RNG-RSP) message including information indicating whether to omit any of processes or transmission of messages for performing a network re-entry procedure with the BS; and receiving, from the MS, a notification indicating the completion of the network re-entry procedure. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100159925 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RETRY OF PACKET DATA CALLS - A method and system for retry of a packet data call. The method can include the steps of attempting ( | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100159926 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING A FAULTY REGISTRATION FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method and system for handling a faulty registration for a subscriber with a mobile communication device in a communications network. A faulty registration comprises a registration missing identification information or having a field that is missing an identifier or other form of information. The method and system comprise selecting another field or property in the faulty registration, which is populated with an identifier or identification information, and searching the selected field or property in a list of registrations for matching identification information. Associating the faulty registration with an existing registration for a subscriber based on matching the identification information. According to another aspect, the system and method comprise generating a new registration for the customer with the faulty registration if a matching registration is not located or search criteria are not satisfied. According to another aspect, the system and method comprise creating a record associated with the faulty registration. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100167732 | PROVIDING OVER-THE-TOP SERVICES ON FEMTO CELLS OF AN IP EDGE CONVERGENCE SERVER SYSTEM - A method is provided for enabling an over the top (OTT) service over a broadband network. The method includes receiving a registration request from a mobile User Equipment (UE) over a femto cell to register with a cellular operator of a cellular network. The registration request is forwarded to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server associated with the cellular operator to register the mobile UE therewith. A rendition of the registration request is forwarded to an AAA server associated with a broadband operator of a broadband network to register the mobile UE therewith. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100167733 | INTERACTIVE MANAGEMENT OF WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) MOBILE DEVICES - A system and methods for allowing an enterprise management system to provision and configure a WWAN communication device on a managed network without incurring the tedious task of manually entering all the configuration information for every WWAN communication device on the enterprise management system. A dedicated communication link is provided with a standard communication protocol so each WWAN device can communicate with a carrier server and have the carrier server acts as a validation point and communication bridge to the enterprise management server until the WWAN communication device is configured for management by the enterprise management server. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100167734 | CREATING A GLOBALLY UNIQUE IDENTIFIER OF A SUBSCRIBER DEVICE - To register a mobile device located in a first network with a packet-switched services network, a registration request is received from an aggregation device in the first network. The registration request contains an identifier of the aggregation device and identification information of the mobile device, where the identification information is previously unknown to the packet-switched services network. A globally unique identifier of the mobile device is dynamically created based on the identifier of the aggregation device and the identification information of the mobile device, wherein the globally unique identifier is used for uniquely identifying the mobile device in the packet-switched services network. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100167735 | RECOVERY TECHNIQUES IN MOBILE NETWORKS - A technique for protecting location information of a subscriber in a mobile network is disclosed which forwards a registration request from the subscriber to an S-CSCF including the subscriber's TA and then forwarding a location update from the S-CSCF to an HSS including the subscriber's TA. Upon the S-CSCF losing data, lost data may be restored to the S-CSCF from the data stored in the HSS. The HSS may store data in a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk drive. The technique may also include forwarding a registration request from the subscriber to an S-CSCF including the subscriber's TA and then forwarding a location update from the S-CSCF to an HSS and storing data in a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk drive in the S-CSCF so as to be protected against loss. Upon the S-CSCF losing data, lost data including the subscriber's TA may be restored to the S-CSCF from the data stored in the S-CSCF. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100178917 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, QoS CONTROL DEVICE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF GUARANTEEING QoS - A mobile communication terminal device includes: an operation unit registering information related to a predetermined region in which a user desires QoS guarantee; a sending unit sending the information related to the predetermined region registered in the operation unit and information that can identify a current position of the mobile communication terminal device; a receiving unit receiving QoS guaranteed data when the current position is in the predetermined region; and a control unit controlling a behavior of sending the information in the sending unit and a behavior of guaranteeing the QoS in the receiving unit. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100184431 | Method and System for Registering Femtocells to Provide Service - Aspects of a method and system for registering femtocells to provide service are provided. In this regard, a communication device may be operable to determine a plurality of femtocells within a vicinity of its location. The communication device may be operable to receive information communicated from one or more of the plurality of femtocells, which are managed by a femtocell management entity. One or more of the plurality of femtocells may be selected for transmitting and/or receiving cellular data based on the communicated information. The communicated information may comprise one or more of global navigation system satellite (GNSS) coordinates, an identification number, potential interference, power levels, location, associated communication devices, and/or directionality of antennas of the one or more femtocells. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100184432 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR LOW POWER CONSUMPTION, CALL CONTROL SERVER AND ACCESS GATEWAY - It is provided a mobile communication system comprising base stations, call control servers and access gateways. The call control servers cause a mobile terminal accommodated in one of the control server to transmit the location registration request so that the mobile terminal accommodates in another control server according to a processing amount of control signals. The base station selects a second call control server into which the one of the mobile terminals is to be newly accommodated. The one of the call control server switches to a power-saving state after the mobile terminal is accommodated into the another call control server. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100190496 | METHOD TO GENERATE NEIGHBOR LIST FEMTO CELL ENVIROMENT - A method and system for neighbor list generation in a femtocell environment based on access permissions of user device at neighboring femto access points (FAP) is disclosed. The method of accessing a network comprises a femto gateway determining location of a user device, using the femto access points as reference, femto gateway creating a list of neighboring femto access points the user device is authorized to access, femto gateway sending the neighbor list to a femto access point, where the user device is camped on the femto access point, femto access point sending the list to the user device, user device scanning femto access points in the list and the user device requesting access to a femto access point from the list, if needed. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100190497 | Telecommunications network access rejection - A method of controlling an attach procedure of a device | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100190498 | Method and system for managing closed subscriber group of a femto base station in WiMAX system - A femto base station of a WiMAX system can manage a list of closed subscriber groups (CSGs). A CSG indicator is broadcast. The femto base station receives a registration request message from a mobile station having received the CSG indicator and adds the mobile station to a CSG registration list. The femto base station searches for the mobile station from the CSG registration list if an attach request message is received; and forwards the attach request message to an access service network (ASN) gateway if the mobile station is in the CSG registration list. The femto base station establishes a link message with the mobile station if an attach acceptance message corresponding to the attach request message from the ASN-gateway. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100197305 | CORRELATING REGISTRATIONS ORIGINATING FROM A DEVICE - Systems and methods for correlating multiple registrations from a single device are disclosed. A private ID used in an prior registration may be used to obtain subsequent private IDs. The subsequent private IDs may be used in subsequent registrations. An instance ID from an prior registration may be used in conjunction with different registration IDs in subsequent registrations. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100197306 | BASE STATION AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A base station ( | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100197307 | ACCESS CONTROL FOR ACCESS TERMINALS - Problems caused by interaction between paging optimization and synchronizing CSG information are mitigated by setting a network indication indicating, for example, that a subscriber is no longer a member of a CSG, but the network has not yet received confirmation that an access terminal associated with the subscriber has been informed of this. A timer-based scheme may be employed for removing a CSG ID from the subscriber information for a subscriber once it is determined that the subscriber is no longer a member of the CSG. In addition, a temporary member of a CSG may determine whether it is still a member of a CSG upon expiration of a CSG timer. Also, the frequency with which an access terminal registers may be changed based on various criteria. Furthermore, an allowed CSG list may be selectively included in a page message depending on the destination of the page message. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100210263 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING ACCESS TO A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK VIA AN ACCESS NETWORK - A method of managing access to a telecommunication network, said network comprising a core mobile network that can be accessed through at least one access network, the method comprising a step of sending, by a registration device of the access network and addressed to a core mobile network management device, following a registration of a mobile terminal with the access network performed by the registration device, a message to inform the management device of the registration carried out. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100210264 | PORTABLE CELLULAR PHONE SYSTEM HAVING AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION - A portable cellular phone system is provided, wherein matched sets of algorithmically generated communication units are generated, each defining an increment of authorized communication. One set is stored on a system server, i.e. a service provider, and the pre-paid set is available for use within a portable cellular phone. The portable cellular phone, which is normally non-activated, automatically contacts the system server upon selective activation by the user, to initiate a call (outgoing or incoming). A voice recognition system allows the user to place calls and/or receive calls. During a call, the portable cellular phone and the system server allow authorized access to communication, while the communication units are decremented at the system server and at the portable cellular phone. The portable cellular phone typically has either an internal energy supply and storage for the pre-paid communication units, or a removable airtime cartridge, typically containing an energy supply and either the ability to store or to generate a set of pre-paid single use airtime communication units. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100216465 | System and Method of Wireless Network Selection Based on Service Offered - Provided is a system and method of wireless network selection based on service offered. The wireless device scans for available wireless networks upon an event triggering registration. If the wireless device determines based on its SIM that none of the available wireless networks are high priority networks for registration, then the wireless device automatically selects an available wireless network for registration based on, for at least one of the available wireless networks that the wireless device previously registered to, whether CS (Circuit Switched) service was rejected but PS (Packet Switched) service was allowed. Next, the wireless device automatically attempts to register with the selected wireless network. In this manner, the wireless device attempts to register with a wireless network that does not reject CS service while allowing PS service. If the wireless device nonetheless registers with such a wireless network, then registration can be reattempted with another available wireless network. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100216466 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBSCRIBER STATION-BASED ADMISSION SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A subscriber station may identify base stations that have sufficiently strong signal strength so that the base stations are candidates to be used for network entry. The subscriber station may determine which of the candidate base stations is least utilized. The subscriber station may select the least utilized base station for network entry. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100216467 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING RADIO RESOURCES USING EXTENDED MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A networked computing system, including multiple radio access nodes (RANs), multiple radio communications controllers (RCCs), and a data communications network facilitating communications amongst the RANs and the RCCs of the system. A regional RAN receives a default eMIB associated with a first type of RAN (e.g., a macrocell, microcell, picocells, or femtocell RAN types) from a RCC, in response to a registration event of a RAN initialization process. The regional RAN maintains a dynamic eMIB comprising network operating parameters determined by various self-optimization processes. The network operating parameters of the dynamic eMIB are selected to fall within a range designated by the default eMIB. During a network failure condition, the regional RAN is configured to use a temporary eMIB comprising failure level operating parameters in order to mitigate network deficiencies caused by the network failure condition. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100222057 | ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVICE CONTROL - An access system for device control, the system including a communications device, a registration server, a session control element and application control element contained within an access server and a subject device, the communication device arranged to provide a registration signal recognisable by the registration server as to identity and to establish a handshake control interaction, the registration server arranged to establish a register communication path to the access server, the access server having an access indicator to at least one subject device, the access server arranged to analyse the handshake control interaction to determine whether the access indicator is present in the handshake control interaction, the access server arranged to establish a session control path to an application link for the subject device, the application link establishing a device control protocol with the subject device, the system arranged whereby the registration signal and/or the handshake control interaction and/or register communication path and/or the session control path and/or the device control protocol used consistent or respectively different signal language regimes, but the handshake control interaction provides at least one control function for the subject device in terms of an allocated function control signal within the handshake control interaction. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100240366 | CONNECTION ATTEMPT MESSAGE PROCEDURE ENHANCEMENT FOR MANUAL SELECTION OF A HYBRID HOME NETWORK BASE STATION - A method, a mobile system, and a home network base station are disclosed. A processor | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100248720 | Detecting Cloning of Network Devices - Techniques are provided to detect cloning of network device identity when network device is seeking registration for service in a network. A control server manages access to the network in which a plurality of network devices are configured to communicate and serve client devices. The network devices require registration with the service gateway in order to provide services. When network devices register with the service gateway, the service gateway performs local clone detection by looking for active registrations from devices with the same identity and by further communicating with the control server. The control server receives registration request messages associated with network devices seeking registration for service from gateway devices, wherein each registration request message includes data comprising an identifier of the network device that is seeking registration that is derived from data stored within a memory of the network device, and an identifier of the gateway device from which the registration request message is received. The control server evaluates the data contained in registration request messages with respect to stored data in order to determine whether a network device identity has been cloned when its registration request message contains an identifier that is already being used by at least one other network device. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100248721 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A POINT TO POINT CALL A CALL SERVER AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A POINT TO POINT CALL - The invention relates to a method for establishing a call between a first access point and a second access point, by means of a network for multipoint broadcasting. The method comprises a step for attribution ( | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100267381 | Method and Arrangement for Using Certain Information Acquired Upon Registration at a Base Station Especially for Traffic Forecasting - In a method and an arrangement for using certain data acquired upon registration of a mobile communication device of a mobile subscriber of a cellular provider at a switching center, in particular for traffic forecasting, wherein the acquired data comprise at least a numerical identification associated with the person of the subscriber and time and location of registration at the switching center, the numerical identification is used at least partially as an argument of a true one-way function or pseudo one-way function for calculating a functional value. The functional value is associated with the acquired data, especially time and location of the registration. The acquired data including the functional value but without the numerical identification are transmitted to a unit using the data. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100267382 | REPEAT DIALING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS TO CALLED PARTIES THAT ARE POWERED OFF - A wireless network is disclosed that provides repeat dialing to called parties that are powered off. The wireless network includes an originating MSC system, a Home Location Register (HLR) system for a called party, and a serving MSC system that serves the called party. Responsive to identifying that the called party is powered off, the calling party transmits a repeat dialing instruction to the originating MSC system. The originating MSC system then transmits a repeat dialing indicator to the HLR system for the called party. The HLR system for the called party identifies when the called party powers on. When the called party does power on, the HLR system transmits an instruction to the serving MSC system to attempt to set up a call between the called party and the calling party. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100273481 | FEMTO NODE POWER ADJUSTMENT USING REQUESTS FOR REGISTRATION - Systems, devices, and methods for adjusting a transmission power at a femto node are described herein. According to the systems, devices, and methods herein, a measurement of a signal transmitted from a transmitting node may be communicated to the femto node, for example from a user equipment or a neighboring femto node, for use in adjusting the power. The transmitting node may comprise the femto node, a macro node, or a neighboring femto node. In addition, statistics regarding such measurements may be communicated to the femto node for use in adjusting the power. The femto node may also adjust the power based on unsuccessful registration attempts or interference communications received at the femto node. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100273482 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING RR-LEVEL REGISTRATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques to reduce the amount of registration required by a mobile station in a wireless communication system, especially if the registration zones are defined to be small areas. In one scheme, a mobile station registers (e.g., at RR-level) with a network entity (e.g., a base station) each time it enters a new registration zone, which can correspond to an R-TMSI zone defined by GSM MC-MAP. The mobile station maintains a timer for each zone with which it has already registered but has since left. If the mobile station leaves a particular zone for a period longer than a time-out period, the registration with that zone times out, and the mobile station re-registers with that zone whenever it re-enters the zone. The mobile station may implement zone-based, timer-based, implicit, traffic channel RR, and some other registrations, or a combination thereof. Parameters to facilitate registration may be defined by a base station. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100273483 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DATA IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of communicating data in a wireless communication system is disclosed. More specifically, a method discloses transmitting a request by a mobile subscriber station (MSS) to a network entity via a de-registration request message requesting the network entity to retain a preferred session information, and receiving a selected session information via a de-registration command response from the network entity. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100279685 | WIRELESS TERMINAL MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, WIRELESS TERMINAL MANAGEMENT METHOD, WIRELESS TERMINAL MANAGEMENT PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless terminal management apparatus includes a communication unit performing short-distance wireless communication with wireless terminals; a registering unit that registers information indicating a wireless terminal connectable to the communication unit; a determining unit that determines whether the number of registrations of information indicating a wireless terminal registered in the registering unit has reached a given number of wireless terminals allowed to connect to the communication unit; an updating unit that when a non-registered wireless terminal is nearby and if the number of registrations has reached the given number, updates the number of registrations such that information indicating the non-registered wireless terminal becomes registered; and a searching unit that searches for a wireless terminal nearby, where if a search result indicates no registered wireless terminals and a non-registered wireless terminal nearby, the updating unit updates to enable information indicating the non-registered wireless terminal to be registered by the registering unit. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100279686 | PROXIMITY BASED ACCESS CONTROL - A method for reducing interference to wireless communication devices is disclosed. A proximity of a wireless communication device to a base station is determined. The proximity of the wireless communication device is compared with a proximity threshold and based on the comparison, access to a femtocell may be granted to a restricted/non-CSG (closed subscriber group) wireless communication device. The method also includes causing a registration response to be sent to the wireless communication device based on the comparison. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100279687 | ACCESS MODE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL - Access control for an access point (e.g., a cell of the access point) may be based on an access mode associated with the access point. For example, depending on the access mode, access control may involve performing a membership check for the access point. Such a membership check may be performed at a network entity, a source access point, or some other suitable location in a network. In some aspects, access control may involve performing a membership check for an access point in conjunction with a context fetch procedure. Such a procedure may be performed, for example, when an access terminal arrives at the access point after experiencing RLF at another access point. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100285801 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is disclosed for registering a mobile terminal with a cellular telecommunications network, the network having a plurality of location areas and a plurality of extended areas of coverage, each extended area being represented by a list of a subset of cells on one or more the location areas, and the mobile terminal using information about a given one of the location areas to connect to the network. The method comprises transmitting a signal including a temporary identifier, which is unique to the mobile terminal when combined with the location area identifier that identifies the cell in which the temporary identifier was allocated a temporary identifier; transmitting an indication of whether the mobile terminal supports location registration based on extended areas (“soft location registration”); and if soft location registration is supported, performing location registration based on the extended area between the mobile terminal and the network. The above method is compatible with existing deployments of 2G and 3 G networks in both packet switched (PS) and circuit switched (CS) domains. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100304745 | REDUCING FREQUENT HANDOFFS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for reducing frequent idle handoffs of a wireless communication device is described. A registration request is received by a base station or a femto access point from the wireless communication device. The number of registration requests received from the wireless communication device are counted while the registration timer is running. It is determined that frequent handoffs are happening when the number of registration requests received is greater than a registration threshold. A transmit power of a femto access point is adjusted if the number of registration requests received indicates that frequent handoffs are happening. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100304746 | Customized Location Area Paging - Methods for determining a customized location area (CLA) for a subscriber in a cellular network are provided herein. One such method includes the steps of monitoring the cell to which a mobile station registers; storing data corresponding to the cell within a database; determining at least one CLA based upon the data, the CLA each including at least one cell; storing said at least one CLA; utilizing a predictive algorithm to determine which CLA the mobile station is currently located within, if at least two CLAs are stored; and paging each of the cells associated with the appropriate CLA. Other methods are also provided. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100311419 | Mobility Management Entity Tracking for Group Mobility in Wireless Communication Network - A method and apparatus for updating a wireless mobile device with mobility management entity (MME) identification information when the mobile device camps on a mobile relay node (RN), that supports group mobility, connected to a first base station (BS) supported by a first MME. In one embodiment, the mobile device receives an identity associated with a second MME when the mobile RN connects to a second BS served by a second MME without first sending a registration message. In another embodiment, the mobile device receives mobile RN specific MME identification information. Upon decamping from the mobile RN and camping on a new BS, the mobile device transmits the identity associated with the second MME or the mobile RN specific MME identification information for establishing a connection with the network. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100317343 | Interference Control, SINR Optimization and Signaling Enhancements to Improve the Performance of OTDOA Measurements - A wireless terminal receives signaling information, pertaining to a reference signal transmission in at least one specifically designated sub frame, the signaling information including a list, the list including base station identities. The terminal determines, from at least one of the base station identities in the list, the time-frequency resources associated with a reference signal transmission intended for observed time difference of arrival (OTDOA) measurements from a transmitting base station associated with said one base station identity. The time of arrival of a transmission from the transmitting base station, relative to reference timing, is measured. The wireless terminal can receive a command from a serving cell to start performing inter-frequency OTDOA measurement on a frequency layer containing reference signals, the frequency layer distinct from the serving frequency layer, the serving frequency layer not containing positioning reference signals. The wireless terminal can perform OTDOA measurements subsequent to the reception of the command on a carrier frequency different from the serving cell carrier frequency. A base station transmitter can jointly schedule a reference signal transmission from a plurality of base station transmitters for the purpose of OTD estimation enhancement, and transmit identical reference signals from the plurality of base station transmitters, the reference signals being identical both in the signal sequence and time-frequency resources used for transmission. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100330990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNLOADING TERMINAL QUICKLY - A method and an apparatus for quickly unloading a terminal are provided. The method comprises: paging a user terminal which is registered in a mobile switch to unload through a wireless access node after the mobile switch to unload receives a command of unloading the user terminal; the mobile switch to unload detecting whether a paging acknowledgement returned from the user terminal is received, if yes, sending a message to notify that the user terminal is to be unloaded, and then releasing the current signaling connection with the user terminal. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110009118 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF NETWORK RESOURCE RELEASE PROCESSING - A method of network resource release processing is provided, which includes the following steps. After user equipment (UE) using idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism registers to two 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) communication networks, when the UE changes from the 3GPP network to a non-3GPP communication network, a serving gateway (serving GW) receives a message sent from a peer endpoint network element (NE), and deletes network resources established by the two 3GPP communication networks for the UE according to the message. A mobility management NE and a serving GW are also provided. Through the method and device of network resource release processing, the resources are released when the UE using the ISR mechanism changes from the 3GPP network to the non-3GPP communication network. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110014912 | CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method of determining whether to accept a connection request from a user device requesting connection to a communications network is described. The method includes receiving a connection request from the user device, the connection request including a predefined identifier. A message requesting capability information associated with the user device is then generated and transmitted and the capability information is received in response. The method further includes determining whether to permit a connection to the user device based on the capability information and transmitting a message to release or reject or to establish the connection based on the determining. Apparatus for performing the method, including an eNodeB, gateway and user device are also described and corresponding methods of operation these components are provided. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110021192 | ACCESS CLASS BASED PICOCELL - Systems and methods for managing radio access point infrastructure such as picocells. A user equipment registration request is received at a node that manages a plurality of radio access points and enables connectivity with macro mobile communication services supplied by a service provide. In response to the user equipment request, a user equipment policy request is generated and sent to a policy database. A user equipment policy associated with the user equipment is received from the policy database, and thereafter user equipment traffic is treated in accordance with the user equipment policy. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110021193 | MOBILE STATION, TRANSMISSION RELAY, BASE STATION, AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING DATA USING CONNECTION IDENTIFIER IN MULTI-HOP RELAY SYSTEM - A Connection Identifier (CID) including an ID of a base station and an ID of a transmission relay is assigned to a mobile station by a transmission relay to transmit and receive information among the mobile station and the base station via the transmission relay. A mobile station includes a receiving unit to receive a CID from a transmission relay connected to a base station, the CID assigned by the transmission relay and including an ID of the base station and ID of the transmission relay; and a transmission unit to transmit data to the base station through the transmission relay based on the CID. The transmission relay includes a CID assignment unit to assign the CID to the mobile station. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110021194 | METHOD FOR CONTEXT HANDLING - The invention therefore relates to a method, a first Mobility Control Node and a second Mobility Control Node for context handling when a user equipment, UE, moves from a previous Access Network, AN, to a present AN. The ANs are adapted to communicate with a Core Network, CN, and the UE is adapted to communicate wirelessly with the AN's. The method comprises the steps of: the UE detecting that it has entered a Mobility Area, MA, belonging to the present AN, said MA not being registered with the CN, the UE initiating a Mobility Area Update, MAU, procedure in response to the detection by sending a MAU Request message comprising an UE Temporary ID to a Radio Access Node, RAN, the RAN adding a Mobility Area Identity, MAI, to the Request message and forwarding the message to a first Mobility Control Node, MCN, responsible for the present AN, the first MCN deriving one second MCN from the UE Temporary ID and sending a context request message to said second MCN. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110053590 | DEFINING THE INITIATOR FOR A CONFIGURATION OR A SET OF OF AN ACCESS NETWORK CONNECTION - Devices and methods initiate the structuring or the configuration of an access network connection for an access of a terminal to a telecommunications network, such as a cellular mobile radio network. Before the structuring or configuration of the telecommunications network, it is decided whether this structuring or this configuration of the access network connection should be initiated through the telecommunications network or through the terminal, and that the terminal is notified of this decision by the telecommunications network in one or more messages. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110053591 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PAGING-AREA DETERMINATION METHOD AND CALL-PROCESSING CONTROL APPARATUS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In order to narrow down base stations within the tracking-area-based paging area to ones within a smaller area where the mobile unit may exist in a mobile communication system performing the paging on the tracking-area basis, the mobile communication system has a location registration information database memorizing tracking area information, a last location registration information and a N-th (N is an integer of one or more) location registration information from the last for each mobile unit, calculates statistical data on a movement distance for each mobile unit based on the location registration information memorized in the location registration information database, and performs the paging via base stations included both within an area whose radius is equal to the calculated statistical data on the movement distance and within the tracking area. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110053592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING FEMTOCELL - A femtocell utilizing method and apparatus are disclosed. A mobile terminal may establish a communication channel to a microminiaturized base station for mobile communication creating a femtocell on the basis of a frequency, PSC information, or a frequency band or multiple frequencies. The mobile terminal employing the method and apparatus enables the user to initiate femtocell search at a desired point in time, increasing effectiveness in utilization of a femtocell. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110053593 | LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO BASE STATION - A location registration method according to the present invention, includes: transmitting, at a mobile station (UE), a TA signal, when detecting that the mobile station (UE) has moved out of a TA list with which the mobile station (UE) is already registered by location registration processing; and transferring, from a radio base station (eNB) to an exchange (MME) identified by an exchange ID included in the TAU signal. An exchange ID assigned to a mobile station (#a) belonging to a first layer is different from an exchange ID assigned to a mobile station (#b) belonging to a second layer, even though the same exchange is identified by the exchange IDs. A TA list and a pool area set for the mobile station (#a) is different from a TA list and a pool area set for the mobile station (#b). | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110053594 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LOCATION MANAGEMENT OF USER EQUIPMENT IN GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK - In apparatus for location management of a UE in a generic access network (GAN), one or more points of attachment (PoAs) are grouped together to create GAN paging area (GPA) information. The GPA information is transmitted to the UE in a register accept message during a location registration with the UE so that the UE checks the GPA information and performs a register update only when the UE moves between PoAs of different GPAs when changing PoA, thereby enabling an efficient power consumption of the UE. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110059739 | Method of Radio Access Technology Selection and Related Communication Device - A method of radio access technology (RAT) selection for a mobile device in a wireless communication system includes selecting a first RAT to use when powering on, wherein the first RAT is capable of providing services of a first service domain, handing over to a second RAT capable of providing services of a second service domain when the mobile device needs to perform a first service on the second service domain, and returning to the first RAT while the mobile device needs to perform a second service on the first service domain. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110059740 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS USING A DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ARCHITECTURE - A non-transitory computer readable storage medium of a first distributed management architecture (DMA) system includes a first home location register (HLR) that stores information associated with one or more mobile subscribers that are registered with the first DMA system. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes a community location register (CLR) associated with a second DMA system. The CLR stores information associated with a second HLR of the second DMA system, and the second HLR stores information associated with one or more mobile subscribers that are registered with the second DMA system. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium includes instructions that, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to initiate connection of a call from a first mobile subscriber to a second mobile subscriber via the first DMA system and the second DMA system when the second mobile subscriber is registered with the second DMA system. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110070886 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, HANDOVER METHOD, EXCHANGE, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO CONTROL STATION - Provided is a mobile communication system configured to permit a cell under a femto radio base station Node B# | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110070887 | Method of Informing a Network of Change of User Equipment Capability - A method of informing a network of a change of user equipment capability includes: receiving, by a network, a register request message carrying information of new user equipment capability to from a user equipment; analyzing, by the network, the register request message, and storing the information of new user equipment capability for reference by subsequent establishment of a session; stopping a current registration timer on the server side set for the user equipment; initiating a new registration timer on the server side for the user equipment; and sending a response message carrying information of the new registration timer on the server side to the user equipment so as to reset a registration timer on the user side based on information of the new registration timer on the server side in the response message. The capability change is informed to the network in time. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110077005 | Registration Notification For SMS over LTE - An LTE subscriber database pushes a registration notification to a SMSC or IP-SM-GW when subscriber registers/deregisters to LTE. The subscriber registration information is stored in local database. Thus, MT SMS may be delivered to a registered subscriber without querying the subscriber database each time for registration information. An exemplary apparatus includes an interface for receiving a registration status message for a mobile device over a broadband network, a subscriber database, and a control system for storing subscriber information in response to receipt of the registration status message and forwarding a notification of subscriber registration status including subscriber registration information to a first network device when the mobile device registers or deregisters to the broadband data network. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110086637 | NETWORK SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile communication terminal may include a reception unit to receive a message from a network server in accordance with an entrance of the mobile communication terminal to coverage area of a small-sized base station, a message definition unit to verify that an expiration time is included in the received message defining the message as a driving command message, and a terminal control unit to extract the expiration time from the defined driving command message and to drive a terminal timer to reduce the extracted expiration time. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110092205 | POSITION REGISTERING METHOD, RADIO CONTROL STATION, AND EXCHANGE - In a position registering method, a radio control station (RNC) transmits report information including a first position number, which has been extracted by using a cell identifier as key information, to the cell identified by the cell identifier. A mobile station (UE) transmits a position registration request when the first position number included in the report information is different from a position number stored in the mobile station: The radio control station (RNC) notifies the first position number and the second position number, which have been extracted by using as the key information the cell identifier for identifying the requester of the position registration request, and a user identifier for identifying the mobile station. An exchange (MSC/SGSN) stores the notified user identifier, first position number, and second position number in association with one another. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110092206 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMS USER SESSIONS WITH DYNAMIC SERVICE SELECTION - Under one aspect, a system generates dynamic call models within an IMS network, allowing different user entities (UEs) to have different service experiences. The IMS network includes application servers (ASs) and a serving call state control function (S-CSCF) that receives and then forwards UE service requests. The system includes storage media storing a service tree, which defines potential call models that map potential UE service requests onto ASs. At least two potential call models map a specified potential UE service request onto different ASs that can provide different service experiences. The system includes control logic for providing session control, which receives UE service requests from the S-CSCF, receives the service tree from the storage media, generates a call model for each UE based on potential call models defined by the service tree and on the requested service, and invokes a specified AS based on the generated call model. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110092207 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - In a radio network control device, if TMSI included in a connection request is not stored in a subscriber-information storage unit, IMSI corresponding to the TMSI is acquired from a higher-level device and access control is performed for radio communications between a mobile terminal and a base station. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110098042 | Apparatus and Method for Deriving Idle Mode Parameters for Cell Selection/Reselection - An apparatus, system and method for deriving idle mode parameters for cell selection/reselection in a communication system. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a measurement manager configured to provide an event sequence estimating communication channel performance between a user equipment operable in an active mode emulating an idle mode and at least one of a serving base station and a target base station. The apparatus also includes a cell selection/reselection subsystem configured to select/reselect the target base station for the user equipment operable in the idle mode employing an idle mode parameter derived from a plurality of event sequences at the serving base station. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110098043 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are provided for facilitating device-to-device connection establishment. A method may include directing broadcast of an indication of a device-to-device registration area identification in each of one or more cells forming a device-to-device registration area identified by the device-to-device registration area identification. The method may further include directing receipt of a device-to-device registration request originated by a first terminal apparatus in response to the broadcast indication. The first terminal apparatus may be located within the registration area. The method may additionally include registering the first terminal apparatus based at least in part upon the device-to-device registration request. Corresponding apparatuses and systems are also provided. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110098044 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK APPARATUS - A mobile communication method for allowing an access-permitted mobile station to access a specific radio base station, the mobile communication method includes the step of when an access-unpermitted mobile station not registered as a mobile station permitted to access the specific radio base station performs a first predetermined communication in a predetermined area, registering the access-unpermitted mobile station as the mobile station allowed to access the specific radio base station. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110098045 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of signalling a set cell identities in a cellular radio system from a transmitter to a receiver is provided. The method includes coding of a sequence of cell identities using a range indicator. The coded sequence is then signalling using the coded sequence. The range indicator can be an range indicator or an explicit range indicator. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110105117 | Method And System Of Delivering An SMS Message - A Mobile Switching Center (MSC) receives a short message service (SMS) message from a mobile station. The MSC checks a link between it and an MME to see if the link is currently set. If the link is not currently set, the mobile station is re-registered at the MSC, which re-established the link between the MSC and the MME. The mobile station will resend the SMS message to the MSC, which now utilizes the re-established link to deliver the SMS message. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110105118 | DELAY AND BACKHAUL-EFFICIENT PAGING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Described herein is methodologies for efficient utilization of backhaul resources of a network for delivering paging data to an access terminal (AT) without sacrificing delay performance. A location that buffers data for an AT can be adaptively changed based on factors such as the location of the AT, applications utilized by the AT, and a recent activity level of the AT. To facilitate this determination, an AT can be configured with one or more registration boundaries. An AT can be configured with a small registration radius such that if the AT does not move outside of the small registration radius, data can be delivered directly to a data attachment point for the AT. If the AT moves outside of the small registration radius, the registration radius can be switched to a large registration radius and the access gateway can instead locally buffer data for the AT. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110111756 | LI/DR Service Continuity in Case of Number Portability - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements to perform monitoring-continuity in case of number portability in a telecommunication The method comprises a step wherein a monitored user (B) requires number portability from an operator of a donor network (DNW) to an operator of a recipient network (RNW). The method further comprises the receiving of a number portability event—temporary address (NPE | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110117913 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, EXCHANGE, AND SPECIFIC RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method includes a mobile station transmitting a location registration request on the basis of a pilot signal, a network device judging, in response to the received location registration request, whether or not access to a specific radio base station from the mobile station is permitted, the network device rejecting location registration processing when the access is judged not to be permitted, and the network device making a determination so that the transmission power of the pilot signal in the specific radio base station is reduced when the number of rejections of location registration processing exceeds a predetermined number of times. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110117914 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEREGISTRATION OF PERSONAL NETWORK ELEMENT(PNE) IN 3GPP PERSONAL NETWORK(PN) - Disclosed is a control method of user equipment (UE) to deregister a personal network element (PNE) in a personal network (PN), the control method including receiving a deregistration request message from the PNE via a personal area network (PAN) internal communication means in order to deregister the PNE registered to the PN and subordinate to the UE, transmitting a request message for deregistration of the PNE to a session control device controlling a session with respect to the PN in response to the deregistration request message, receiving a response message corresponding to the request message for deregistration of the PNE from the session control device, and transmitting the response message to the PNE via the PAN internal communication means in order to notifying deregistration of the PNE. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110124338 | DELAYED GEOSPECIFIC MOBILE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT - A technique and system are provided for executing a delayed geographically specific activation procedure for a telematics unit associated with a vehicle. In an exemplary mode, the method includes first programming a memory of the telematics unit with geographically specific data including at least a location identifier specifying a geographic location and a PRL associated with the specified geographic location. After the vehicle is transported into the geographic location specified by the location identifier, the telematics unit detects that the vehicle is in the specified geographic location and responsively activates a PRL associated with the specified geographic location. Having access to the PRL, the telematics unit initiates a number assignment process over a wireless network extending within the specified geographic location via OTASP or a cleared number call, so that the telematics unit is assigned a dialing number associated with the specified geographic location. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110124339 | EARLY IMS SECURITY - A method for providing Early IMS Security in a network. In registering a terminal on a telecommunications network, a plurality of private user identities (IMPIs) are derived from the IMSI of the terminal. Some or all of these IMPIs are registered with the network. Each IMPI has its own IRS containing its own IMPUs, enabling different identities of the user to be registered with the network. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110130138 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN MACRO BASE STATION AND HOME BASE STATION - Methods and apparatus are provided for performing a handover from a macro base station to a home node in the macro base station of a mobile communications system. A location of a terminal is received from the terminal at the macro base station. A handover from the macro base station to the home node to which the terminal is registered is initiated, when a distance between the location of the terminal and a location of the home node is less than a first predefined threshold. A request for an allocation of frequency and resources having a minimum interference with the macro base station for the home node is transmitted to a home node controller. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110130139 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PERFORM TIME ZONE DETERMINATION BY A MOBILE STATION - This application pertains to methods and apparatus to perform time zone determination by a mobile station. One example method for use in a communication device includes determining a geographical location and universal time for the device; determining a time zone for the device based on the geographical location; determining a time for the device based on the universal time and the time zone; using the determined time in applications operable on the device, wherein the applications operable on the device comprise applications other than the application used to determine the geographical location. Other examples are shown and described. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110143756 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS SUBSCRIBER WITH A NETWORK CONTROLLER - Redirection of mobile subscriber registrations using location information is described. In one embodiment, the invention includes establishing a data communications connection with a mobile station at a data communications network controller, receiving location information from the mobile station, and redirecting the mobile station to a different network controller based on the received location information. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110151869 | System and Method for Event Driven Operations in a Communications System - A system and method for event driven operations in a communications system. A method for communications subsystem operation includes detecting an occurrence of an event initiated by a user, accessing a database to retrieve information related to the user and the event, establishing a connection with an application, and performing an operation with the application through the connection. The application is based on the event and the information, and the operation is based on the event. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110151870 | METHOD FOR PARTITIONING CELL IDENTITIES ACCORDING TO CELL TYPE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method of transmitting a cell type information, which is transmitted by a base station in a wireless communication system, is disclosed. The present invention includes broadcasting a boundary point information (Z) between a cell identity of a public ABS (advanced base station) and a cell identity of a private ABS via an S-SFH SP3 (secondary-super frame header subpacket3). In this case, the boundary point information (Z) is a range information of cell identity partitions partitioned by granularity of 10 sequences or 20 sequences per segment and a total number of the cell identity partitions is 16. Further, the range information of cell identity partitions includes information that all cell identities are cell identities of the private ABS or information that all cell identities are cell identities of the public ABS except for cell identities of a macro ABS. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110151871 | IMS NETWORKS WITH AVS SESSIONS WITH MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORKS - IMS networks with AVS sessions with multiple access networks. Systems and methods associate multiple access network sessions with a given user endpoint (UE) device. A UE is managed in an IMS network to have multiple concurrent sessions to corresponding access networks. An application server in the IMS network creates a computer-implemented representation of an audio video session (AVS). The AVS representation includes a first incoming leg (ICL) to represent at least the initial access network to which the UE has access. Subsequently, it is determined that the UE can access a different access network than the initial access network. The different access network is of different type than the initial access network. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110171957 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An ASN-GW that controls communication of a plurality of BSs of which each wirelessly accommodates MS includes a PGID management table that manages PG # | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110177811 | REGISTRATION WITH A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PROVIDER - A method performed by a mobile device to register for cellular data connection service provided by a mobile telecommunications service provider. The mobile device determines that it does not have a valid cellular data connection subscription with the mobile telecommunications service provider. Responsive to that determination, the mobile device connects to a cellular data connection service registration site to allow a user of the mobile device to register for data connection service provided by the mobile telecommunications service provider. The mobile device is limited to accessing the data connection service registration site until the user registers for data connection service. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110177812 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile communication method, when a mobile station UE has moved from an area inside UTRAN to an area inside E-UTRAN, a connection process with “Default APN” is executed if no connection with the “Default APN” is established even if it is determined that no position registration process need to be executed for the E-UTRAN. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110177813 | SMALL BASE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A procedure when a mobile station apparatus accesses a CSG cell in which it is unregistered is defined and a procedure based on the definition is performed. A small base station apparatus applied to a mobile communication system, receives a originated call request message including a user identifier and priority information from a camping mobile station apparatus, determines whether or not to permit the originated call request of the mobile station apparatus, based on the user identifier and the priority information, and transmits the determination result to the mobile station apparatus. In addition, the small base station apparatus permits the originated call request, if the user identifier included in the originated call request message of the mobile station apparatus indicates that the mobile station apparatus is registered. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110177814 | Access Control for Terminals in UTRAN FEMTO System - The teachings herein provide authorization control enabling the co-existence of legacy mobile terminals ( | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110183670 | Method of Improving Circuit Switched Connectivity and Related Communication Device - A method of improving CS connectivity for a mobile device in a wireless communication device is disclosed. The method includes attaching to a first network in a first domain and a second network in a second domain separately; and maintaining a first registration and a first mobility procedure associated with the first network, and a second registration and a second mobility procedure associated with the second network; wherein the mobile device is capable of receiving signals of the first network and signals of the second network simultaneously but transmitting signals to either the first network or the second network. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110189993 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING TEMPORARY SUBSCRIBER OF SMALL BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile terminal transmits a temporary subscriber request message requesting a temporary subscriber registration to a subscriber management server of a core network via a macro base station if camping on a small base station fails, a subscriber management server receives the temporary subscriber request message and transmits the temporary subscriber request message to the small base station if the mobile terminal is registrable as a temporary subscriber of the small base station, and a small base station receives the temporary subscriber request message and determines whether to accept or reject the temporary subscriber registration of the mobile terminal, and transmits, to the subscriber management server or to the mobile terminal, a temporary subscriber response message indicating that the mobile terminal is permitted to be registered as a temporary subscriber if the temporary subscriber registration is accepted. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110195714 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING REGISTRATION ACROSS RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate balancing cross-domain paging with registrations performed by a device moving between multiple networks. A device communicating in idle-mode with one or more base stations can obtain one or more parameters regarding a base station using a radio access technology (RAT) to control whether the device performs registration on a network of a different RAT. Thus, the device moving from an area of coverage from one base station of the RAT to a different area that includes coverage from another base station of the different RAT (or vice versa) can determine whether and/or when to perform a registration on the network of the different RAT for receiving paging signals related to the different RAT based at least in part on the one or more parameters. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110207458 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal includes a location registration request unit | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110212723 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK BASED MOBILITY FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL IN AN IMS (IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM) ARCHITECTURE - Method for supporting network based mobility for a mobile terminal in an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) architecture, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to a femto cell or to a macro cell—source cell—and wherein handover of an actual session of the mobile terminal is performed to another femto cell or macro cell—target cell—, wherein the femto cells and the macro cells are provided with an eMSC-server (Mobile Switching Center Server enhanced for IMS Centralized Services) function, and wherein the source cell's eMSC-server function hosts a source user agent and the target cell's eMSC-server function hosts a target user agent, is characterized in that the source user agent contacts the target user agent directly or indirectly prior to executing the actual handover, and wherein the source user agent prepares the target user agent together with the corresponding access network by exchanging handover related information. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110217980 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO INDICATE SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATING CAPABILITIES OF A DEVICE - Example methods and apparatus to indicate space requirements for communicating capabilities of a device are disclosed. In accordance with a disclosed example method, a request is sent to a network to request a quantity of blocks to be allocated for use by a mobile station. The quantity of blocks is determined based on a data size to identify radio access capabilities of the mobile station. An allocation of the quantity of blocks is received from the network. Radio access capability information of the mobile station is sent via the allocated blocks. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110223912 | ACCESS CONTROL BASED ON RECEIPT OF MESSAGE FROM ACCESS TERMINAL - Access control techniques enable an access terminal to obtain service through an access point. In some aspects, access control techniques may be used to enable a user (e.g., an owner) of an access point to control whether an access terminal obtains service through the access point. For example, a user may temporarily disable access control at an access point to enable access points that register with the access point while access control is disabled to thereafter be allowed to obtain service through the access point. As another example, a shared secret may be provided to an access terminal whereby, upon presenting the shared secret to an access point, the access terminal is allowed to obtain service through the access point. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110223913 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING STATUS OF FEMTOCELL IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for operating a terminal in a broadband wireless communication system including a macrocell and a femtocell are provided. The method includes receiving femtocell information relating to a femtocell to which the terminal is registered, determining whether the terminal enters a region where the femtocell belongs, using the femtocell information, when entering the region where the femtocell belongs, transmitting a message to wake up the femtocell, and searching for the femtocell. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110230188 | Methods and Network Nodes in a Mobile Communication Network - In accordance with embodiments of the present invention, a list of preferred Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs) is used by a radio access network (RAN) node for distributing subscriber registrations to respective core network (CN) nodes and, notably, is expanded to also include the Mobile Subscriber Identity Number (MSIN) of subscribers. At least one bit of the MSIN, starting from the most significant bit, is interpreted to indicate the CN node to which a subscriber registration is to be routed. In this way the granularity of the preferred PLMN list is increased and it is thereby possible to steer subscriber registrations to specific core network nodes (e.g., Mobile Switching Centers and/or Serving GPRS Support Nodes) within one CN network operator. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110230189 | Communication Network System and Mobile Terminal - An identification-information extracting unit extracts first identification information of a location registration area of a wireless communication system. A storage unit stores correspondence information concerning a relationship between the first identification information and second identification information of a location registration area managed by a communication network system. A location-registration requesting unit transmits location-registration request information for requesting a location registering device to perform a new location registration when the second identification information is updated by a movement of a mobile terminal. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110237253 | LIMITING REDIRECTIONS IN AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORK - A method and system for limiting redirections of a mobile station (MS) in an unlicensed radio access network having a plurality of unlicensed network controllers (UNCs). The MS includes a redirection counter set to zero within a registration request sent to one of the UNCs. Each time the MS receives a redirection response from a UNC, the MS increments the redirection counter and sends it in another registration request. Once the redirection counter has exceeded a defined value for the MS, the UNC rejects any registration request from that MS. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110244857 | METHOD FOR AUTHORIZING MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS BY FEMTOCELL BASE STATION, FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AND PROCESSOR READABLE MEDIUM - A method for parking a mobile communication apparatus of a femtocell base station and applicable to a communication network including a core of an apparatus network, the femtocell base station, and the mobile communication apparatus. The femtocell base station obtains a RRC connection request of an international mobile station identity (IMSI) of the mobile communication apparatus and compares the obtained IMSI with the IMSIs in a mobile communication apparatus authority list created in the femtocell base station. Once the mobile communication apparatus enters a communication area covered by the femtocell base station, the femtocell base station will determine whether the mobile communication apparatus is authorized to park the communication area or not. Unauthorized subscribers are rejected before the femtocell base station is established the communication relation with the core of the apparatus network, thereby saving network resource and speeding up rejection. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110250885 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP (CSG) CELL FOR OPEN NETWORK ACCESS - Method for operating one or more cells ( | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110256868 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system which performs communication between a base station device configuring at least one cell and a mobile station device, wherein: the base station device includes: a synchronization signal generation unit which generates a synchronization signal corresponding to a cell identity for identifying a cell; and a transmission unit which generates a first transmission signal including the synchronization signal using a first parameter obtained from the cell identity, generates a second transmission signal excluding the synchronization signal using a second parameter obtained from a virtual cell identity different from the cell identity, transmits the first transmission signal using a first frequency band, and transmits the second transmission signal via a second frequency band different from the first frequency band. The mobile station device includes: a reception unit which receives a first reception signal including the synchronization signal using the first parameter obtained from the cell identity via the first frequency band and receives a second reception signal using the second parameter obtained from the virtual cell identity via the second frequency band. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110269460 | Closed Subscriber Group Cell Identification for Active Mode Mobility - While camped on a first cell with a first access node, it is determined that a second cell of a second access node is a private cell. From information received from a network it is determined that a criteria is satisfied, and conditional on the criteria being satisfied, a unique identifier for a private network of the private cell is decoded. Exemplary embodiments include a method, apparatus and computer readable medium storing a program. In various specific and non-limiting embodiments: being camped on the first cell comprises being in an active RRC CONNECTED state; the information received is broadcast information, the determining is by comparing received L1 ID to a list of locally stored CSG L1 IDs; the received broadcast information comprises a first portion of a TA ID and the criteria being satisfied comprises the first portion matching an entry of a locally stored whitelist. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110275371 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING THE REDUCTION OF MOBILITY SIGNALLING AT INTER-RAT CHANGE - Method for optimizing the reduction of mobility signalling after an Inter-RAT change for a UE roaming between a source area covered by a source telecommunication core network and a target area covered by a target core telecommunication network, wherein a signalling reduction function is activated by the source telecommunication core network, and wherein deactivation triggering events of the signalling reduction function generates a need for registration update at next IRAT change occurred. The method comprises the steps: storing in the UE a parameter the value of which indicates whether or not the deactivation triggering events of the signaling reduction function only correspond to the UE context modification, and, after the Inter-RAT change,
| 11-10-2011 |
| 20110275372 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING REGISTRATION BACKUP DATA - A method, an apparatus, and a system for processing registration backup data are disclosed. A Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) receives a request from a User Equipment (UE) and judges whether the request carries multi-registration information so as to decide whether to add multi-registration indication information into a Server Assignment Request (SAR) message sent to a Home Subscriber Server (HSS). The HSS performs operations according to whether the SAR message carries the multi-registration indication information, therefore avoiding unnecessary signaling interactions, reducing the signaling load, avoiding unnecessary data processing between the HSS and the S-CSCF, and saving system resources. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110287765 | OPERATION OF MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - The invention relates to operating a Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device for communication with a cellular radio network. A transmission is made from the MTC device to the cellular radio network to register the MTC device with the cellular radio network. The transmission includes a message from the MTC device to the cellular radio network, identifying the MTC device as an MTC device to the cellular radio network. Also, the MTC device has an associated HPLMN. An instruction is received at the MTC device from the network not to make a transmission from the MTC device for accessing the network. The instruction specifies a criteria for the MTC device's HPLMN or preferred list of networks. The MTC Device compares the criteria with the HPLMN associated with the MTC device and avoids making a transmission to access the network for a period of time based on the result comparing step. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110294505 | SIMPLIFYING SUBSCRIPTION AND LOCATION REGISTRATION OF A MOBILE TERMINAL - Methods, systems, and products for terminal registration with a base station. Aspects of the invention include a method for dynamically performing subscription registration. A method includes pre-storing complete subscription data into a base station; predefining general subscription data in a mobile terminal; initiating, from the terminal, a location registration when within the radio range of the base station, wherein the terminal does not contain complete subscription data, but does contain general subscription data; authorizing the terminal in dependence upon the pre-stored subscription data; and, upon successful authorization, modifying the subscription data in the terminal to correspond to the complete subscription data. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110294506 | PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION - A method of providing location information to a network application, a location server, a method of providing a trigger notification, a femto base station and a computer program product are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: receiving details of a triggering event which is to be notified to the network application, the triggering event being a registration of user equipment with a predetermined femto cell of the wireless telecommunications network; providing triggering information indicative of the triggering event to that femto base station providing wireless communications coverage to the predetermined femto cell to cause that femto base station to provide a trigger notification indicating when the triggering event occurs; and in response to receipt of the trigger notification from the femto base station, providing location information to the network application, the location information providing the network application with an indication of the user equipment Femtocell and the predetermined femto cell, together with an indication of when the triggering event occurred. This enables the movement of user equipment into specific locations to be detected and provided to network application efficiently, without any subsequent location determination processing having to occur, which provides a low-power, scalable, accurate and non- invasive approach requiring no modification of user equipment. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110294507 | REGISTRATION DEVICE FOR MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, REGISTRATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND BASE STATION - A registration device, registering a mobile station in a small cell, comprises a determination unit that determine if the mobile station is to be registered based on distance to the mobile station and length of stay of the mobile station. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110300863 | BASE STATION AND CONTROL METHOD OF BASE STATION - Provided is a base station which uses a pilot beacon to prompt a terminal to perform handoff from a macrocell and is capable of avoiding interference with the macrocell. A base station (FAP) of a mobile communication system has a transmission unit ( | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110300864 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile radio communication system having a mobile radio communication network and a mobile radio subscriber appliance, wherein a unit in the network layer of the core network of the mobile radio communication network is configured to transmit to the mobile radio subscriber appliance a first message, based on an occurrence of a predetermined event, with a request for a statement which describes at least one radio characteristic of the mobile radio subscriber appliance. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110306343 | Method for Registering Communication Terminals with Base Station Devices by Using Virtual Appliances - A method for the registration of a communication terminal is provided. In some embodiments of the present invention, a communication terminal is registered with a base station by searching and executing a virtual appliance that contains base station software with which the communication terminal pre-subscribed. In some embodiments of the present invention, a communication terminal is registered as an endpoint device for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) uniform resource identifier (URI) when the communication terminal registers with the base station. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110312324 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE OF FEMTOCELL, AND TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER FOR THE SAME - A service method of a femtocell for simultaneously providing a plurality of femto services to a plurality of mobile stations, and a transmitter and receiver for the same. When a femto advanced base station supports a plurality of femtocell subscription types, and it simultaneously provides data services with different qualities to mobile stations having subscribed to different femtocells. The femtocell subscription type supported by the femto advanced base station is advertised to the mobile station through an identifier at a PHY level or an identifier at a MAC level. A CSG-closed femtocell provides a high-quality data service to limited subscribers, a CSG-open femtocell provides a relatively low quality data service to limited subscribers, and an OSG femtocell provides the lowest quality data service to all mobile stations irrespectively of subscription states. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110319078 | MOBILE SWITCHBOARD, MOBILE UNIT, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND POSITION- REGISTRATION EXTENDING METHOD - A mobile unit transmits a request for position registration to a network when moving from a first area to a second area. When the number of incoming calls does not exceed a threshold and the number of movements between the first area and the second area exceeds a threshold, a mobile switchboard combines the first area and the second area into an extended area, and informs the mobile unit of the extended area. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20120009925 | Paging Success Rate Mechanism - A method for handling registration requests in a cellular wireless communication system. The method includes determining that a transmission-success rate of messages sent via the forward-link of an air interface is less than a threshold success rate. The method further includes, in response to the determination that the system has less than a threshold transmission success rate, increasing a frequency at which mobile stations register with the cellular wireless communication system via the air interface. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120015653 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MITIGATION OF UNLISTED CELL IMPACTS IN IDLE MODE OF CELLULAR SYSTEMS - A UE, in an idle mode, receives pilot signals and synchronization signals from a serving cell and neighbor cells comprising neighbor cells listed and/or unlisted in a neighboring cell list. The UE validates each of the serving cell, the listed neighbor cells and the unlisted neighbor cells from the received signals. The UE performs cell measurement on the listed cells as well as the unlisted cells for multipath profiles and associated power levels. In instances where number of attempts of the cell measurements on the unlisted cells exceeds a threshold value, the UE may validate presence of the unlisted cells. The best available cell is selected from the listed cells and the unlisted for the UE to camp on. I/Q samples of the received signals are stored while measuring or monitoring the cells. The stored I/Q samples may be utilized to carry out baseband procedures through offline processing. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120015654 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate allowing position determination of devices in wireless networks with home evolved Node Bs (HeNB). An HeNB can determine its location based at least in part on positioning measurements from one or more devices. The HeNB can additionally or alternatively register its location or other location parameters with a positioning server for subsequent provisioning as assistance information for determining a device position. Moreover, a device can request assistance information related to a different base station where the HeNB is not registered with the positioning server. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120015655 | CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of routing call signalling to a destination address from a first cellular mobile communications network comprising a plurality of cells to one of a plurality of smaller cells collectively identified in said first mobile communications network by a single virtual cell identifier. The method involves receiving call signalling for a call in a first routing domain associated with said first mobile communications network, and then determining in said first routing domain from said destination address a forwarding address for said call signalling, wherein said forwarding address comprises said virtual cell identifier, forwarding said call signalling to a network gateway node associated with said virtual cell identifier in said first routing domain, said gateway node being further arranged to participate in a different routing domain by identifying, using said different routing domain, the identity of one of said smaller cells associated with said destination address; and finally, routing the call signalling to said destination address. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120021743 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which a home base station operating in a hybrid access mode is able to provide preferential connectivity to mobile communication devices that are members of a closed subscriber group associated with the home base station compared to mobile communication devices that are not members of the closed subscriber group. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120028640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER - A method and an apparatus for identifying a UE in an SAE network, and an MME are provided herein. The method includes: receiving an SAE-TMSI which is allocated to a UE that accesses an SAE network and includes at least: a pool-ID, an MME-ID, and a UE temporary identifier; using the SAE-TMSI to temporarily identify the UE in the SAE network. The apparatus includes: a receiving unit and a temporary identifying unit. The MME includes a temporary identifier allocating unit. Moreover, a method for transmitting and allocating a temporary identifier, and a method for receiving and transmitting information according to the temporary identifier are disclosed herein. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120034918 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING IDLE-MODE OPERATION USING MOBILITY INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for performing a location update based on mobility information indicating a velocity of a Mobile Station (MS), and a method and apparatus for using a timer for a location update in a wireless access system are disclosed. The MS transmits a deregistration request message requesting initiation of idle mode to a first Base Station (BS), receives a deregistration command message including paging group information from the first BS, the paging group information including a primary paging group Identifier (ID) and primary paging offset of a primary paging group allocated to the MS, and a secondary paging group ID and secondary paging offset of a secondary paging group allocated to the MS, and activates a paging group location update timer after moving from the primary paging group to the secondary paging group. The deregistration request message includes first mobility information indicating a velocity of the MS and the paging group information is set based on the first mobility information. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120040669 | Method and Apparatus for Handling URA Information - A method and apparatus for handling URA information for a wireless communication device are disclosed. A method for handling URA information for a wireless communication device, the device configured to be operable in a mobile telecommunications system, the method comprising, at the device receiving a message to enter a new state, and initiating a URA update procedure dependent on the message not comprising a URA information. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120040670 | Hardware Activation of Dual USIM Multimode Mobile Terminal - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for hardware activation of dual USIM TD-SCDMA multimode mobile terminals. The technique effectively provides for efficient power consumption. In one aspect, a mobile terminal may register dual mobile identifiers on a first radio access technology (RAT) using a first hardware module. If a call is set up, the mobile terminal activates a second hardware module and registers the unused mobile identifier with the second RAT. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120040671 | Method and Device for Processing Information Given Idle-Mode Signaling Reduction - A method for processing information given idle-mode signaling reduction (ISR) is disclosed. A serving gateway receives an information update request containing information of related to a current access network where a user equipment is located if the user equipment moves from another access network to the current access network which the user equipment has been registered. The serving gateway updates relating information of the current access network and keeps relating information of the another access networks unchanged if the information update request comprises indication information of idle-mode signaling reduction activation. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120046033 | COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION METHOD IN CELLULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - Provided is a coordinated communication method in which a plurality of cells cooperate to perform multi-antenna transmission and reception in a cellular wireless communication system. A terminal wirelessly transmits channel state information (CSI) feedback to a serving cell and at least one coordinating cell. The serving cell and the coordinating cell perform multi-point coordinated communication using the CSI feedback. Even if the serving cell and the coordinating cell belong to different base stations, information exchange between the cells is minimized, so that a transmission delay and a traffic increment of a backhaul network can be prevented. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120058764 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING LOCATION UPDATE REGISTRATION PROCESS IN MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting a location update registration process used for an idle mode operation of a Mobile Station (MS) in a Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication are provided. The method includes determining whether a system global location update registration timer is applied to the MS, when it is determined that the global location update registration timer is not applied, determining a timer for updating a location when the MS operates in an idle mode, and transmitting a message including the timer to the MS. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120058765 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING FEMTO BASE STATIONS AND A FEMTO ZONE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a system and to a method for efficiently managing at least one or more femto base stations (BSs) existing in a femto zone containing a plurality of femto cells and for managing the femto zone in a wireless communication network. The system and method of the present invention comprise: receiving a registration request from a first femto base station from among the femto base stations in the femto zone that share a backhaul link; storing the registration of the femto base station and determining the first femto base station as a master base station or a candidate base station in accordance with the registration request; and transmitting, to the first femto base station, a registration acknowledgement message which contains the maximum backhaul link capacity of the femto zone and master base station information if the first femto base station is determined to be master base station, or a registration acknowledgement message which contains master base station information and candidate base station information if the first femto base station is determined to be the candidate base station. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120064891 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE TIME ZONE INFORMATION TO A MOBILE STATION - Methods and apparatus for providing time zone information to a mobile station are described. An example method disclosed herein includes accepting at a generic access network controller a registration request from a mobile station, encoding in a generic access network information element a first offset from a first time, and transmitting the generic access network information element to the mobile station. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120064892 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OBTAINING IDENTITY NUMBER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN AN LTE SYSTEM - System and method for obtaining identity number of user equipment in an LTE system. An identity number of a user equipment may be obtained at an eNodeB in an LTE network having an MME. In order to obtain the identity number, the eNodeB may receive a first message from the user equipment and extract a first part of an identity number of the user equipment from the received first message. The eNodeB may receive a second message from the MME and extract a second part of the identity number of the user equipment from the second message. The eNodeB may form the identity number of user equipment by combining the extracted first part of the identity number with the extracted second part of the identity number. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120077493 | NOTIFICATIONS BASED ON DEVICE PRESENCE - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can facilitate and/or transmit notifications based upon device presence techniques in connection with a wireless communications network. For example, when certain mobile devices register with a particular network entity (e.g., a femtocell) that services a particular target location (e.g., place of residence), then such registration can be leveraged to indicate presence at the target location. Accordingly, notifications can be delivered to custodian devices that indicate the presence information if certain predetermined conditions or criteria are satisfied. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120077494 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING PLURALITY OF SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION MODULE (SIM) CARDS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK (PLMN) IN THE DEVICE - A mobile communication device including Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) cards, and various methods for searching for a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) for each SIM card, are provided. In one method, the device separately starts Home PLMN (HPLMN) timers according to corresponding HPLMN timer values stored respectively in the SIM cards, performs a PLMN search for one of the SIM cards at an expiry of a corresponding one of the HPLMN timers, and updates a PLMN list with one or more PLMNs found during the PLMN search. The device then determines, for all of the SIM cards, whether the PLMN list contains any PLMN with a higher priority than a currently registered PLMN. Also, the device performs, for any SIM card of the SIM cards in which there is any PLMN with the higher priority than the currently registered PLMN, a location registration in the PLMN with the higher priority. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120077495 | ADAPTIVE DATA COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND PORTABLE DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method and a portable device for supporting an adaptive data communication control are provided. The device includes a memory unit, a control unit, and a radio frequency unit. The memory unit stores a table that contains data communication setting information corresponding to each service operator network. The control unit performs a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) selection after entering into a service area of specific service operator network, and receives Mobile Country Code/Mobile Network Code (MCC/MNC) information from the specific service operator network while the PLMN selection is being performed. The control unit extracts the data communication setting information corresponding to the MCC/MNC information from the table, and establishes a data communication connection with the specific service operator network according to the extracted data communication setting information. The radio frequency unit performs the established data communication with the specific service operator network under the control of the control unit. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120077496 | REGISTRATION WITH A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PROVIDER - A method performed by a mobile device to register for cellular data connection service provided by a mobile telecommunications service provider. In one embodiment, the mobile device transmits a probe, through a wireless cellular network, to a main Access Point Name (APN), and the probe is configured to determine whether the mobile device has a valid cellular data connection subscription. The mobile device determines, from a response to the probe, that it does not have a valid cellular data connection subscription with the mobile telecommunications service provider. Responsive to that determination, the mobile device connects to a cellular data connection service registration site to allow a user of the mobile device to register for data connection service provided by the mobile telecommunications service provider. The mobile device is limited to accessing the data connection service registration site until the user registers for data connection service. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120077497 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING AN EVOLVED SYSTEM ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE - A wireless communication system and method of implementing an evolved system attachment procedure are disclosed. The system includes a first core network and a second core network which is evolved from the first core network. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sends an attach request message to the second core network. The second core network activates a packet data protocol (PDP) context and sends an attach accept message to the WTRU. The attach accept message includes information regarding the PDP context. The second core network constructs a session and mobility management (SMM) context for session management (SM) and mobility management (MM) for the WTRU. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120077498 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING OLD NETWORK THROUGH TEMPORARY ID OF EVLOVED NETWORK - A method is provided for accessing a legacy network, such as a 2G/3G network, through a temporary ID of an evolved network. User Equipment (UE) adds Mobility Management Entity (MME) information for uniquely identifying an MME accessed by the UE on an evolved network to an access message sent to an old network when the UE accesses the legacy network through a temporary ID of the evolved network. The legacy network selects a corresponding Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) for the UE according to the access message. After the MME information for uniquely identifying an MME is added to the access message sent to the old network, the legacy network can determine and find the MME that is accessed by the UE in the evolved network without changing a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and an SGSN on the legacy network. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120083270 | FEMTOCELL APPROVED USER LIST MANAGEMENT VIA SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) - A system and methodology that facilitates user friendly and/or dynamic femtocell access provisioning based on Short Message Service (SMS) communication is provided. In particular, the system can enable users to update and/or view a femto access control list associated with a femtocell by employing SMS messages. Moreover, the system can receive a SMS message from a user equipment (UE) requesting an action (e.g., add, remove, and/or view an entry within a femto access control list) associated with femtocell access and identify a femtocell associated with the UE. Further, the system can analyze the SMS, request confirmation to perform the action, and execute the action on receiving confirmation from the UE. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120083271 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: a storing unit configured to store recording medium identification information that identifies a recording medium that is detachable; a network communication unit that is connectable to a communication network; a reading unit configured to read the recording medium identification information stored in the recording medium; a recording medium identification information registering unit configured to write, to the storing unit, the recording medium identification information read by the recording unit; a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with a communication terminal device attached with the recording medium, and to receive a recording medium identification information from the communication terminal device; and a communication control unit configured to at least control the network communication unit to transmit to the communication network, a signal from the communication terminal device, or to control the wireless communication unit to transmit to the communication terminal device, a signal from the communication network which is addressed to the communication terminal device, if the communication control unit determines that the recording medium identification information read from the storing unit is identical to the recording medium identification information received by the wireless communication unit. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120094665 | FEMTOCELL INDICATION OF MOBILE DEVICE PROXIMITY AND TRANSMISSION OF MOBILE IDENTITY TO ASSIST IN RESOLVING FEMTOCELL DISAMBIGUATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described that may provide for femtocells to indicate the proximity of mobile user equipments and/or provide mobile identity to assist in resolving femtocell disambiguation. A femtocell may detect a user equipment in its proximity using an out-of-band link. The femtocell may transmit a proximity indication message to a macro network controller via a core network. The macro network may direct the user equipment to perform a variety of tasks, including directing the user equipment to do a handover to the femtocell. Some embodiments may utilize existing user equipment registrations and femto-to-macrocell outbound handover procedures to address problems such as femtocell ambiguity resolution and triggering frequency searches at a macro network when a current macrocell signal strength is good. These embodiments may utilize dummy identifiers to register the user equipment to facilitate addressing these problems. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120094666 | UNIQUELY IDENTIFYING TARGET FEMTOCELL TO FACILITATE FEMTO-ASSISTED ACTIVE HAND-IN - Systems, methods, and devices are described for supporting macrocell-to-femtocell hand-ins of active macro communications for mobile devices. An out-of-band (OOB) link is used to detect that a mobile device is in proximity of a femtocell. Having detected the mobile device in proximity to the femtocell, an OOB proximity detection is communicated to a femtocell gateway disposed in a core network in communication with the macro network to effectively pre-register the mobile device with the femto-convergence system. When the femtocell gateway receives a handover request from the macro network implicating the pre-registered mobile device, it is able to reliably determine the appropriate target femtocell to use for the hand-in according to the pre-registration, even where identification of the appropriate target femtocell would otherwise be unreliable. Some embodiments may also handling registering the mobile device after a handover request has occurred, including tiered approaches. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120094667 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND SWITCHING CENTER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention comprising, a step in which a mobile station transmits a first location registration request signal including capability information indicating that it is compatible with a second radio access network, to a mobile switching center housing a first radio access network, a step in which the mobile switching center transmits a location registration rejection signal, which includes information indicating that communication using a second radio access network is not allowed, to the mobile station, a step in which the mobile station transmits a second location registration request signal, which includes capability information indicating that it is not compatible with the second radio access network, to the mobile switching center in response to the location registration rejection signal and a step in which the mobile switching center performs a location registration process with respect to the first radio access network of the mobile station in response to the second location registration request signal. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120094668 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provides a system and method for extracting information pertaining to a portable wireless communications device (103) which is connectable to a cellular communication network comprising the steps of: disposing the portable wireless communications device within an enclosure (101) substantially impenetrable by electromagnetic radiation; generating a cell of a cellular communication network within the enclosure; transmitting a signal to the device, the transmitted signal being suitable for initiating registration of the device with the generated cell; receiving a signal from the device comprising information pertaining to the device, the received signal being suitable for registering the device with the generated cell; and extracting information pertaining to the device from the received signal. Embodiments also provide the additional step of generating a message dependent upon the extracted information and transmitting the same, via the generated cell, to the user's device. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120100850 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHODS FOR HANDLING ATTACH PROCEDURE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for handling an attach procedure with a service network is provided. In the user equipment, a wireless module transmits an attach request message to the service network and receives an attach accept message replied to the attach request message from the service network, while a controller determines whether to accept the attach accept message according to a first parameter accompanying the attach accept message and sends an attach complete message, via the wireless module, to the service network in response to the attach accept message being accepted. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120108237 | DISTRIBUTED NETWORK REGISTER - The invention relates to a method for operating a telecommunications network and a telecommunications network for mobile telecommunication, having a network register in which identifier of mobile terminals and network-related user data of the terminals are stored. The network register is formed from a peer-to-peer network having a multiplicity of decentralized register nodes which are networked with one another and are each associated with a geographic region. Hash tables are held in the register nodes, in which hash tables the identifiers of the terminals are stored as hash values and the user data is stored associated with these hash values. The network has at least a first node associated with a geographic region at which a terminal can register, and a second node, which is permanently assigned to the terminal and is associated with a geographic region. The terminal registers with the first node by transmitting the identifier, when it is located in the first region. The first node then determines network-related user data of the mobile terminal on registration, and determines the hash value for that identifier. This hash value is used to determine the second node. The first node either transmits the network-related user data to this second node or itself stores this user data in his hash table together with the hash value and transmits only its own address in the network to the second node. Either the network-related user data or the address of the first node is then stored, associated with the hash value, in the hash table of the second node. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120108238 | METHOD FOR OPERATION OF FEMTO BASE STATION BASED ON RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for opearation of femto base station (BS) is provided. The method includes: transmitting the first low duty operation (LDO) pattern information, which includes length information of an available interval (AI) where the femto BS is activated and length information of an unavailable interval (UAI) where the femto BS is inactivated, to user equipment (UE) and operating based on the first LDO pattern where the first LDO cycle, a sequence of the AI and the UAI, is repeatedly arranged. The first LDO pattern information further including a superframe offset as information for leading a start point of the first LDO cycle. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120115471 | DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION IN FEMTOCELLS - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for discontinuous transmissions in a wireless communications system. In one example, a femtocell uses out-of-band (OOB) signals to detect the presence of user equipment (UEs) in a femtocell coverage area. In response to the detection, the femtocell may transmit in-band signals to facilitate communication with and registration of the detected UE. The femtocell may then perform discontinuous in-band transmissions to the registered UE. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115472 | Method for Selecting a Cell of a Network When a Wireless Communications Device is Turned On and Corresponding Wireless Communications Device - Method for selecting a cell from a network when a wireless communications device is turned on, following a previous power down, comprising a process for obtaining ( | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115473 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING LOCATION INFORMATION IN MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for synchronizing location information between devices in a Machine to Machine (M | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115474 | METHOD FOR DECIDING UNREGISTERED MACROCELL USER EQUIPMENT ADJACENT TO FEMTOCELL BASE STATION - In a method for deciding an unregistered macrocell user equipment (MUE) adjacent to a femtocell base station (home evolved node B; HeNB), a macrocell base station (macro evolved node B; MeNB) decides occurrence of an unregistered MUE influenced by interference from a HeNB among MUEs. The MeNB requests an adjacent HeNB to transmit system information (SI) of the adjacent HeNB of which interference has influence on the unregistered MUE, and the unregistered MUE searches for the SI of the adjacent HeNB and transmits the searched SI to the MeNB, when it is decided that the unregistered MUE has occurred. The MeNB informs the adjacent HeNB of existence of the unregistered MUE using a closed subscriber group identifier (CSG ID) of the SI of the adjacent HeNB, transmitted from the unregistered MUE. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115475 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POPULATION TRACKING, COUNTING, AND MOVEMENT ESTIMATION USING MOBILE OPERATIONAL DATA AND/OR GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION IN MOBILE NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are disclosed herein for population tracking, counting and/or movement estimation. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving mobile phone operational data indicative of user equipment location, where the event data includes location area update messages and periodic registration messages; and performing travel estimation based on the mobile phone operation data, including performing interpolation on data associated with one or more individuals in a population to estimate intermediate positions of a trajectory of each of the one or more individuals for a specified time period based on a shortest path mesh sequence estimation algorithm. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115476 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POPULATION TRACKING, COUNTING, AND MOVEMENT ESTIMATION USING MOBILE OPERATIONAL DATA AND/OR GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION IN MOBILE NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are disclosed herein for population tracking, counting and/or movement estimation. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving mobile phone operational data indicative of user equipment location, where the event data includes location area update messages and periodic registration messages; and performing travel estimation based on the mobile phone operation data, including performing interpolation on data associated with one or more individuals in a population to estimate intermediate positions of a trajectory of each of the one or more individuals for a specified time period based on a shortest path mesh sequence estimation algorithm. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120115477 | Card Application Toolkit Support for IP Multimedia Subsystem - To consolidate session initiation protocol (SIP) messages a user equipment (UE) is made aware of all Internet Protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) applications installed in its memory and on a universal integrated circuit card (UICC) and supported communication services. By obtaining this information before the initial IMS Registration, the UE can save resources by registering all local applications and communication services in single IMS registration. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120122454 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTRATION OF OWNER'S TERMINAL IN SMALL NETWORK OF BASE STATIONS - Provided is a system for registering a terminal, including: a verification unit to verify whether the terminal is a closed subscriber group (CSG) member in response to a registration request to a small base station that is received from the terminal; a search unit to search for an owner terminal of the small base station when the terminal is not the CSG member as the verification result; a request unit to request the found owner terminal to determine whether to approve a CSG member registration of the terminal; and a registration unit to register the terminal as a temporary CSG member when the owner terminal approves the CSG member registration in response to the request. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120129524 | Mobile Location Recovery for MSC Pooling - An entity of a wireless telecommunications network having a pool of Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs) and a Home Location Register (HLR). The entity includes a network interface which sends pages to mobiles associated with a failed MSC of the pool of MSC's and experiencing termination isolation and receives responses to the pages from at least some of the mobiles. The entity includes a processing unit which produces a registration having updated location information for each response received by the network interface, the registration sent from the network interface to the HLR to end each mobile's termination isolation for which a response was received by the network interface. A method of an entity of a wireless telecommunications network having a pool of Mobile Switching Centers (MSCs) and a Home Location Register (HLR). | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120135733 | OPERATOR CONFIGURABLE PREFERRED NETWORK AND RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION FOR ROAMING MULTI-RAT CAPABLE DEVICES - A multi-RAT capable wireless device and a method for execution in a multi-RAT capable wireless device are provided. The wireless device registers with a data communication service registration point and receives an update to a preferred network,RAT combination list stored at the wireless device, the update having been sent to the wireless device responsive to the wireless device registering with the data communication service registration point. Upon an event triggering network registration, the wireless device selects an available wireless network,RAT combination from a set of available wireless network,RAT combinations having regard to the preferred network,RAT combination list. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120142346 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system according to the present invention includes a wireless communication terminal and a base station apparatus. The base station apparatus transmits to the wireless communication terminal, cell information relating to a cell of the base station apparatus, and selectability information indicating whether the cell information is manually selectable. The wireless communication terminal receives from the base station apparatus the cell information and the selectability information of the base station apparatus. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120142347 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) INFORMATION OF CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system for obtaining information relating to an idle mobile station in a cellular network is provided. The system includes a computing platform which is in communication with a radio network controller of the cellular network. The computing platform is configured for (i) generating and sending an input signal through the radio network controller to the radio access network; and (ii) identifying in data outputted by the radio network controller an output signal resulting from the input signal, the output signal including information relating to at least one idle mobile station. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120142348 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR REDUCING ELECTRIC CURRENT CONSUMPTION IN DUAL SIM CARD TERMINAL - The present disclosure relates to a device and a method for reducing an electric current consumption in a dual SIM card terminal, which reduces the electric current consumed in an idle state of a dual SIM card terminal. The device includes: a first SIM card and a second SIM card; and a controller to make a control so that the first SIM card and the second SIM card perform a signaling through an identical channel for a network registration and maintain the identical channel when a power of the dual SIM card terminal is turned on. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120142349 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS ENTITY - An embodiment of the invention provides a communication system. The communication system includes a user equipment which is moving within a coverage of a first network and a second network and is configured to send a location update request to a third access entity of the second network; and the third access entity which is configured to receive the location update request from the user equipment, acquire information of a first access entity of the first network from the location update request and determine whether a predetermined condition is satisfied If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the user equipment is paged through the first access entity, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the user equipment is not paged through the first access entity. As such, the situation that the UE is paged in an area where it is unlikely to appear can be avoided. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120142350 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGEMENT OF INACTIVE CONNECTIONS FOR SERVICE CONTINUITY IN AN AGNOSTIC INTERNET PROTCOL MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - State machine diagram ( | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120149372 | LOCATION INFORMATION COLLECTION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DUAL SIM MOBILE TERMINALS - A location information collection method and system for dual SIM mobile terminals are provided. The method includes sending, by a mobile terminal, a request for location information of the dual Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) terminal to at least one of multiple service centers providing communication services related respectively to SIM cards of the dual SIM terminal, collecting, by the at least one service center, information regarding multiple base stations in which identification information elements of the SIM cards are respectively last registered, and generating tentative location information of the dual SIM terminal based on the collected base station information, and sending, by the at least one service center, the base station information or the tentative location information to the mobile terminal. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120157097 | MESSAGE RELAY HOST FOR DELIVERING MESSAGES TO OUT OF COVERAGE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - System and method for delivering messages to devices not in communication with a transmitting server. One or more wireless devices serve as host devices to relay a message from the server to the target device that is not in communication with the server. The server sends the message to host devices when they are in communication with the server. The host device or devices store the message to be relayed to the target device. When the host device is close to the target device, it establishes a short range wireless link with the target device and transmits the message to the target device. In an example, the messages sent to and stored by the host device are encrypted so they are not able to be read by a user of the host device. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120157098 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VOIP COMMUNICATION COMPLETION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system and method for establishing a voice over Internet protocol link to a called party's mobile telephony device utilizes push notifications to activate a communications application on the called party's mobile telephony communications device. When a request to establish a voice over Internet protocol link to a mobile device is received by an incoming proxy server of a voice over Internet protocol service provider, the service provider causes a push notification to be sent to the mobile device. The called party can respond to the push notification in a manner that causes a communications application on the mobile device to be activated. Once the push notification has caused the communications application to activate, the communications application sends a special registration request to an outbound proxy server. The special registration request causes the outbound proxy server to initiate messaging that is ultimately delivered to an inbound proxy server, the messaging identifying the outbound proxy server with which the communications application has registered. The inbound proxy server can then communicate with the outbound proxy server to obtain information that allows a voice over Internet protocol link to be established with the called party's mobile telephony device. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120157099 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MANAGEMENT SERVER - A femtocell base station | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120165011 | SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS MOBILE TERMINAL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A mobile wireless terminal is provided. The mobile wireless terminal includes a wireless unit, an audio codec, and a processor unit. The wireless unit is configured to connect to a wireless relay to make a voice communication with a phone network via the wireless relay, which is coupled between the mobile wireless terminal and the phone network. The audio codec is configured to process the voice communication. Further, the processor unit is coupled to the wireless unit and is configured to obtain a phone number from a user for an outgoing call to an external party in the phone network, and to connect to the wireless relay over a short-range wireless link. When the connection to the wireless relay is successful, the processor unit is configured to establish a signaling connection on an asynchronous connection-oriented logical (ACL) transport channel, and a voice connection on a synchronous connection oriented (SCO) channel between the mobile wireless terminal and the wireless relay. Further, the processor unit is configured to send the dialed outgoing call to the wireless relay via the signaling connection, and to communicate with the external party via the wireless relay over the voice connection. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120165012 | DETERMINATION OF POSITIONS OF WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS TO BE ADDED TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Positions of non-reference wireless transceivers to be added to a wireless communication network are determined as follows. Each non-reference wireless transceiver performs measurements of times of arrival (TOA) of signals transmitted by other non-reference wireless transceivers, as well as reference wireless transceivers. Thereafter, time difference of arrival (TDOA) values are computed from at least two types of pairs of measurements as follows: (a) unknown-unknown TDOA values are obtained as differences between TOA measurements of signals transmitted by non-reference wireless transceivers and (b) unknown-known TDOA values are obtained as differences between a TOA measurement of a signal transmitted by a non-reference wireless transceiver and another TOA measurement of another signal transmitted by a reference wireless transceiver. Both types of TDOA values are used to solve simultaneous equations to identify the positions of the non-reference wireless transceivers and optionally times of transmission of the signals by the non-reference wireless transceivers. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120165013 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, MOBILE MANAGEMENT DEVICE, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention comprising a step in which the mobile station activates a the reconnection waiting timer for GBR disconnection when RLF has been detected in the AS-GBR bearer, and the mobile station deletes AS bearer related to the AS-GBR bearer when expiration of the reconnection waiting timer for GBR disconnection has been detected before restoration of the AS-GBR bearer is detected, a step in which the mobile station activates a NAS-GBR bearer release timer when deleting the AS bearer information, and the mobile station deletes NAS bearer information related to the NAS-GBR bearer when expiration of the NAS-GBR bearer release timer has been detected. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120172039 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURING LOST TERMINAL USING WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for securing a lost terminal using a wireless network are provided. The system includes a lost terminal registration server to store unique terminal information of a lost terminal, and a terminal including a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) module to connect to the lost terminal registration server to determine whether the terminal is registered as a lost terminal in the lost terminal registration server. If the terminal is determined to be a lost terminal, then the lost terminal may be tracked and/or locked to secure the terminal. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120172040 | METHOD FOR HOME BASE STATION TO ACCESS NETWORK AND HOME BASE STATION MANAGEMENT SERVER - A method for accessing a network by a home base station and a home base station management server for a home base station to access a network are provided, wherein the method includes: the home base station management server receivinges a registrationer request sent from the home base station through by a communication link between the home base station management server and the home base station; the home base station management server determines judging whether to allow the home base station to access the network; the user authentication and registration information including: a security key and access port information; after allowing the access of the home base station, the home base station management server configuring a frequency of the home base station; and after finishing frequency configuration, the home base station management server configuring a radio parameter of the home base station. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120178447 | Service Profile Handling in the IMS - A Home Subscriber Server for handling IP Multimedia Subsystem subscriptions comprises means for maintaining associations between public user identities and Service Profiles, where two or more public user identities can be associated with a common Service Profile, and means for identifying to a network node all public user identities that are associated with a common Service Profile. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120178448 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS VIA INTERLOCK BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting and receiving data via a first base station supporting a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second base station supporting a second RAT in a radio access system supporting a multi-radio access technology, and the method may include allowing the first base station to perform a registration procedure with the second base station; and allowing the first base station to transmit control information required for accessing the second base station to a terminal supporting multi-RAT (multi-RAT terminal), wherein the control information comprises beacon frame transmission timing information of the second base station, and the beacon frame transmission timing is maintained in transmission timing of a downlink frame or downlink sub-frame of the first base station with relative timing offset interval. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120184273 | METHOD OF REGISTERING A LOCATION OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL WITHIN A FEMTO NETWORK WITH A MACRO NETWORK, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUSES - In one embodiment, the method of registering a location of an access terminal within a Femto network with a Macro network includes sending, by a Femto in the Femto network, a message to the Macro network. The message includes a first indicator, a second indicator and an address of the Femto. The first indicator indicates the access terminal. The second indicator indicates to register the Femto address in association with the access terminal. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120184274 | WIRELESS DEVICE ACTIVATION - Tools and techniques for activating a wireless device on a wireless network. In an aspect, such tools can allow an unactivated wireless device (that is, a wireless device that generally would be inoperable on a wireless network) to be given limited functionality in order to activate itself on the network. In some cases, such tools can be implemented within business processes to generate revenue streams for entities involved in the wireless activation process. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120184275 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND DEVICE - A mobile terminal (UE) used in a mobile communication network that includes a mobility management entity (MME) and a serving gateway (S-GW), receives paging from the mobile communication network, upon an arrival of an incoming call destined for the mobile terminal at the mobile communication network, in which if the mobility management entity has restarted, the serving gateway maintains a specific S5/S8 bearer for a preset time period prescribed by a timer, and deletes the specific S5/58 bearer on timeout of the timer, and in response to the paging, re-attaches to the mobile communication network. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120190362 | MOBILE DEVICE REQUESTS OF NON-COMMUNICATION TIME PERIODS TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A particular method includes sending a request from a mobile device associated with a plurality of subscriptions to a wireless communication network. The request indicates a time period requested by the mobile device as a non-communication time period of the wireless communication network with respect to the mobile device. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120190363 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system including a mobile terminal, a base station carrying out radio communications with the mobile terminal, and an access management device managing access from the mobile terminal to the base station, which, when an access group including one or more mobile terminals and one or more base stations is registered with the access management device, grants a mobile terminal included in the access group permission to access a base station included in the access group. When a predetermined condition is satisfied after a mobile terminal subscribes to the access group and is granted permission to temporarily access the access group during an access permit period, and the access permit period expires, the mobile communication system excludes the mobile terminal for which the access permit period has expired from destinations to which a calling message is transmitted through a base station included in the access group. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120196594 | Multicast Optimization and Aggregation in an Enterprise Controller - A method and apparatus are provided for managing radio access point (RAP) devices and enterprise controller devices in a wireless communication network. An enterprise controller device registers with a gateway device, and the enterprise controller device receives a registration request from multiple RAP devices that are serviced by the enterprise controller device. As the RAP devices register with the enterprise controller device, the enterprise controller device generates a list of the RAP devices registered with the enterprise controller. As the enterprise controller receives additional registration requests from additional RAP devices, the enterprise controller updates the list. The enterprise controller sends the list to the gateway device with which it registers so that the gateway device is aware of RAP devices serviced by the enterprise controller device. In this way, aggregated messages may be sent from the gateway device to the enterprise controller. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196595 | BROADCAST AREA IDENTIFICATION - Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer program products are provided for receiving content available for consumption. For example, in one embodiment, an electronic device can provide location information to a management server. The management server can then determine the appropriate broadcast area for the electronic device based at least in part on the location information. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196596 | BROADCAST AREA IDENTIFICATION - Systems, methods, apparatus, and computer program products are provided for receiving content available for consumption. For example, in one embodiment, an electronic device can provide location information to a management server. The management server can then determine the appropriate broadcast area for the electronic device based at least in part on the location information. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196597 | COMBINED BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND BASE STATION CONTROLLER OPTIMIZED ASSIGNMENT OF FRAME OFFSETS - A system, method, and computer readable medium for managing an availability of a call agent, comprising acquiring a session identification by a basestation (BS) and a call agent (CA), wherein the BS is coupled to the CA, if the CA's state is changed from an active state to a standby state, requesting a new connection with the BS; and after the new connection is established between the CA and the BS, sending another session identification from the CA to the BS. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196598 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which mobile telephones are able to roam between neighbouring home node base stations. Techniques are described for allocating U-RNTIs to mobile telephones by the home base stations or the home base station gateway. Techniques are also disclosed for target home base stations to be able to retrieve information needed to respond to a Cell Update request received from a mobile telephone. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196599 | AREA-BASED ACCESS CONTROL METHOD FOR TERMINALS WHICH CARRY OUT M2M COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A regional access control method is provided in a Mobility Management Entity (MME) for network access for a User Equipment (UE) that performs Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication. An access request message and location information of the UE are received from a base station. The access request message is transmitted to the MME in response to reception of the access request message at the base station from the UE. A location of the UE that is determined based on the location information of the UE, is registered in a Home Subscriber Server (HSS). An allowed list of the UE is obtained from the HSS. It is determined whether the location information of the UE is registered in the allowed list. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120196600 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD OF GATEWAY DEVICE, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120202491 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - An SAE/LTE or 4G cellular telecommunications network is disclosed which comprises a plurality of eNodeBs and a network core. A plurality of mobile telecommunications devices are registered with the network and communicate with the network core via the eNodeBs. At least one relay is provided between the eNodeB and the mobile telecommunications devices to extend the radio coverage provided by the eNodeB. Radio Resource Control signalling is tunnelled between the mobile telecommunications device and the relay. A Relay Resource Control signalling protocol is additionally provided for tunnelling signalling between the relay and the node. One or more further relays may be provided in a communication path between the first-mentioned relay (the controlling relay) and the eNodeB. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202492 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING IDENTIFICATION OF A REJECTING NETWORK IN CONNECTION WITH REGISTRATION AREA UPDATING - A method for enabling identification of a rejecting network in connection with registration area updating may include receiving an indication of a rejection by a network entity of a request for a registration area update procedure provided by a mobile terminal, and causing an information element to be inserted into a reply to the request that indicates the rejection. The information element may indicate an identity of the network corresponding to the network entity. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202493 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COUNTING DEVICES RELATED TO BROADCAST DATA SERVICES - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include counting devices for broadcast data services. The devices can be counted based on registrations received from the devices. This registration count can additionally or alternatively be used to determine whether further counting is desired. In addition, base stations can transmit counting requests to the devices using a paging message or other message such that idle mode devices can receive the counting requests. The idle mode devices can respond to the requests or send autonomous counting report by switching to an active mode for the purpose of responding or another purpose. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202494 | Method and Apparatus in a Telecommunications Network - The present invention provides a method in a call session control node ( | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202495 | Localized Information Service for Cellular Networks Using Multicast Channels - A system Is proposed for providing a localized information service using an infrastructure of a cellular communication network, the system comprising: a service source terminal arranged for transmitting a network upload message to the cellular communication network, said network upload message comprising a payload part; and a reflection entity of said cellular communication network arranged for receiving said network upload message, for generating one or more reflection messages comprising said payload part, and for sending said one or more reflection messages to at least one service destination terminal that has a predetermined spatial relationship with said service source terminal, wherein a spatial zone is defined and the system is arranged for automatically operating in a connected mode of the cellular communication network at least one of the service source terminal and the at least one service destination terminal that is inside the spatial zone. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202496 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND DEVICE - A mobile terminal (UE) used in a mobile communication network that includes a mobility management entity (MME) and a serving gateway (S-GW), receives paging from the mobile communication network, upon arrival of an incoming call destined for the mobile terminal at the mobile communication network, in which if the mobility management entity has restarted, the serving gateway maintains a specific S5/S8 bearer and deletes other bearers, and in response to the paging, re-attaches to the mobile communication network. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120202497 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRIGGERING SCHEDULING INFORMATION REPORTING - Embodiments of the application provide a method, system and device for triggering scheduling information reporting. The method including: determining, by a terminal, whether state transition occurs or an Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) Radio Network Temporary Identifier (E-RNTI) changes; when determining the state transition occurs or the E-RNTI changes, adopting, by the terminal, reconfigured resources or a new E-RNTI to trigger the scheduling information reporting. By adopting the method for triggering the scheduling information reporting put forward by embodiments of the application, information about state transition at a terminal or changed E-RNTI may be reported to a Base Station (BS) timely, so as to guarantee normal communications between BS and terminal. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120208537 | EXTENDED CAPABILITY TRANSFER BETWEEN A USER EQUIPMENT AND A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for transferring new capability information in an efficient and backward compatible manner are described. A user equipment (UE) may send a new capability indicator to a wireless network to indicate that the UE has new capability information to send. This new capability indicator may be implemented with a spare bit in an information element included in an initial message sent to the network. The network may request for the information or indicate that it can receive the information. The UE may then send the new capability information to the network upon receiving the request or the indication. Alternatively, the network may convey that it supports transfer of new capability information, e.g., via a broadcast message or a unicast message. The UE may then send new capability information at any time to the network, without having to send the new capability indicator. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120214485 | Systems and Methods for Emergency Arming of a Network Access Device - Methods and systems for emergency registration of a vehicle network access device are disclosed, including monitoring one or more vehicle risk indicators; analyzing the one or more vehicle risk indicators for the likelihood of an emergency; and initiating registration of the vehicle network access device in response to analyzing the one or more vehicle risk indicators. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120214486 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OPERATION CONTROL METHOD, AND LOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVER - A communication system according to an exemplary aspect of the present invention is a communication system including a location management server for managing the location of a mobile station, a base station for deciding an exchange which accommodates the mobile station via the base station in response to a location registration request from the mobile station and making the location registration request to the exchange decided, and an exchange for making the location registration request to the location management server in response to the location registration request from the base station, wherein the location management server designates an exchange for accommodating the mobile station in response to the location registration request. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120214487 | METHOD FOR A NETWORK SIDE TO ENABLE AN MSS TO ENTER THE IDLE MODE IN A WIRELESS MAN - The present invention provides a method as regards how a network side gets a MSS into the idle mode in a wireless MAN, including: the PA/BS sends a DREG_CMD to the MSS; the MSS sends a DREG_REQ message to the PA/BS, according to the DREG_CMD message, requesting to enter the idle mode; the PA/BS releases the link of the MSS and updates the data of the anchor PC/LR after receiving the DREG_REQ message. The present invention specifies the process of a MSS entering the idle mode initiated by the network and the settings of relevant parameters, thus enhancing the stability of the process of entering the idle mode and saving the system resources. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120214488 | Method and Telecommunications Network for Controlling Activation Of At Least One Terminal In a Machine-Type Communication Application - The invention relates to a method for controlling activation of at least one terminal in a machine-type communication application using a wireless access network. The wireless access network comprises a number of location areas, each of the location areas comprising a plurality of cells. The terminal has been assigned an identifier. First, a location identifier is received from a location provider, the location identifier indicating a subset of cells of at least one of the location areas. Activation of the at least one terminal is then controlled by transmitting at least one broadcast message on at least one cell broadcast channel in the cells of the subset indicated by the location identifier. The broadcast message contains the identifier or identifier part assigned to the terminal, such that the at least one terminal is signalled that the broadcast message is intended for him An activation control system and a mobile terminal for use with such a system are also disclosed. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120220296 | Method and system for accomplishing user equipment purge - The present disclosure relates a method and system for accomplishing a UE purge. The method comprises: a combined node initiates a purge flow of the UE to a HSS to which the UE is attached when determining that a registration state of the UE in all mobility management network elements of the combined node is unregistered and the registration state is not consistent with a registration state of the UE stored in the HSS; wherein the combined node comprises one or more mobility management network elements. The method and system for accomplishing user equipment purge provided by the present disclosure are simple and convenient to implement and effectively solve the technical problem in the prior art. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120220297 | Method and Mobile Switching Center (MSC) for Implementing Load Re-Distribution - A method for implementing load redistribution is disclosed in the present invention, and the method includes that: when a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) node in a MSC pool needs the load redistribution, the MSC node sequentially performs paging processing on UEs in a Visitor Location Register of the MSC node according to a set paging rate and distributes a Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity including Null-Network Resource Identifier and a Non-broadcast Location Area Identity to UEs which return paging responses, thereby realizing the load redistribution of the MSC node. A MSC for implementing load redistribution is also disclosed in the present invention, and the MSC includes a load redistribution processing module and a transmitting module. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120225651 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mobile communication terminal is described comprising a first identity module; a second identity module; a detector configured to detect whether the mobile communication terminal is in a coverage area of a reference mobile communication network of the first identity module; and a controller, configured to, if it has been detected that the mobile communication terminal is not within the coverage area of the reference mobile communication network of the first identity module, determine a reference mobile communication network of the second identity module, and to start a registering process for registering the first identity module with the reference mobile communication network of the second identity module. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120225652 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - There is provided a method in a first communications device operable to communicate with a second device using a network supporting first and second different communication methods. The method comprises: allowing the first device to communicate with the second device using the first communication method; registering the first device on a service platform of the network; requesting from the service platform a second device status indicator of the ability of the second device to communicate using the second communication method; receiving the second device status indicator from the service platform; and, allowing the first device to communicate with the second device using the second communication method in dependence on the received second device status indicator. The second device status indicator depends on the current network connectivity of the second device. At least one of the first and second devices is a mobile telecommunications device. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120225653 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A DEVICE IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is provided for selecting a device in a telecommunications network in accordance with characteristics relating to the implementation of a telecommunications service, comprising the following steps: a) receiving a set of characteristics relating to said service; b) forming a first symbolic address for querying an address server, using at least one portion of the overall characteristics of the set on the one hand, and an address domain name on the other hand; c) sending the first address to the address server; d) receiving a list of one or more devices compatible with the characteristics; and e) selecting one device from the list. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120238268 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF HAND-IN TO A FEMTO NODE - Methods and apparatuses are provided for causing active hand-in of a device from a macrocell base station to a femto node, which can be an inter-frequency hand-in. The femto node can broadcast a beacon over an operating frequency of the macrocell base station, and the macrocell base station, and/or one or more network components, can identify the femto node based on one or more parameters reported by the device from receiving the beacon. The beacon can be transmitted at varying powers to ensure active hand-in triggering, mitigate interference and/or can be powered on and off for such purposes. In addition, a macrocell base station can regulate compressed mode periods during which a device can measure the femto node based on receiving information regarding device proximity to the femto node, or a device can generate proximity indication messages base on measuring the beacon signals, etc. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120238269 | Method of and a system for establishing presence of a mobile station in at least one dedicated service area of a mobile telecommunications system - A method of and a system for establishing presence of a mobile station in at least one dedicated service area of a mobile telecommunications system providing service to a plurality of geographically spread service areas. A mobile station is triggered to provide location information relating to the presence of the mobile station at a location receiving service from a service area comprising the or each dedicated service area. Presence of the mobile station in the or each dedicated service area is established by comparing the location information provided by the mobile station and stored location information relating to the or each dedicated service area. If present in a dedicated service area, the mobile station automatically receives dedicated services to which the mobile unit is entitled to. Receipt of dedicated services is automatically indicated to a user of the mobile station. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120244861 | PROVIDING LOCATION BASED SERVICES FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Systems and methods are provided that allow the delivery of location based services within a communication network. The location information can be retrieved using information from the mobile node when the mobile node registers in the network. The location information can then be cached or stored in one or more places in the communication network and correlated with the mobile node's addressing information. If a request for location based services is received without location based information, the gateway can use location based information regarding the mobile node to provide location based services. The gateway can enable non IMS mobile nodes to obtain IMS location based services or incompatible mobile nodes to obtain location based services. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120244862 | ACCESS TECHNOLOGY INDEPENDENT IDENTIFIER GENERATION - A network system for communicating with mobile nodes has multiple gateways that can operate with each using a different access technology. In an IPv6 system, the access gateways each provide an interface identifier to the mobile nodes using the same one or more keys and hash so that different the same interface identifier regardless of the access technology used. The access gateways can have multiple options for using keys and/or hashes to provide an interface identifier such that the method for determining the interface identifier is configurable. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120252448 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR TRIGGERING THE REPORTING OF NEIGHBOR RELATION INFORMATION - Various methods for triggering the reporting of neighbor relation information are provided. One example method may include causing neighbor cell relation information to be stored in association with a transition from a first radio access technology to a second radio access technology, and determining that a user equipment has idle mode signaling reduction enabled. The example method may also include in response to at least performing the transition and determining that the user equipment has idle mode signaling reduction enabled, causing a connection to be established to send a neighbor cell relation information indicator, which indicates that the neighbor cell relation information is available to be reported from a user equipment to a network entity. Similar and related example methods, example apparatuses, and example computer program products are also provided. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120252449 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO IMPROVE HIGH-SPEED MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to improve high-speed mobility. In one embodiment, the method comprises connecting a device to a cell. The method also comprises maintaining, at the device, information related to a location of the device. The method further comprises triggering, by an event trigger related to a velocity of the device, a transmission of a report that includes the information related to the location of the device. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120252450 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless communication system includes: a plurality of mobile stations; and a base station which periodically receives a predetermined kind of information from one or more registered mobile stations registered in the base station among the plurality of mobile stations via a radio channel shared among the registered mobile stations. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120258712 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARED BINDING MAINTENANCE - The present disclosure provides a system and method for shared binding maintenance. In accordance with one example embodiment, there is provided a method for use on a network component for updating bindings, comprising: receiving a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message concerning a particular Address-of-Record (AOR); and updating a list of one or more bindings for the particular AOR in a registration repository. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120258713 | Multimode Base Station - A method of controlling admission of a user equipment to a cell of a multi-mode base station, being a base station arranged to operate as a plurality of cells, the plurality of cells comprising at least a first cell and a second cell, and the method comprising: determining information relating to the first cell, and controlling admission of a user equipment to the second cell in dependence on the information relating to the first cell. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120258714 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MOBILE HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus to manage mobile handover are disclosed. An example mobile station includes hardware and software stored on a tangible computer readable medium that, during operation, cause the mobile station to receive from a network controller a response to a network registration request, wherein the response includes an indicator to indicate a type of cell that may be reported by the mobile station during a handover procedure and send a handover message indicating cells permitted by the indicator. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120264427 | SMS-INITIATED MOBILE REGISTRATION - Embodiments are directed towards SMS-initiated mobile registration. A mobile device sends an SMS message to a mobile registration device. In response, the mobile registration device generates a random identifier and associates it with the mobile device identifier of the mobile device. Then, the mobile registration device sends a response SMS message to the mobile device, the response SMS message containing a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) to a mobile registration web page, where the URI contains the generated random identifier. The mobile device uses the URI to navigate to the mobile registration web page, where additional registration information is provided. The mobile registration device associates the additional registration information with the mobile device based on the generated random identifier included in the URI, and creates a user account based on the mobile number from which the SMS message was received and the additional registration information. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120264428 | NETWORK SELECTION - The present invention provides for method of selection by a User Device of a desired PLMN offering a desired service, such as emergency bearer services, from a list of PLMNs within a shared network environment, the method includes creating a list of network identifiers for the said plurality of PLMNs respectively, and locating the identifier of the said desired PLMN at a predetermined position within the said list. Related User Devices and network node devices are also provided. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120270545 | DUAL NETWORK MOBILE DEVICE RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - A single chip mobile wireless device capable of receiving and transmitting over one wireless network at a time maintains registration on two wireless communication networks that each use different communication protocols in parallel. Periodically, the mobile wireless device tunes one or more receivers from a first wireless network to a second wireless network in order to listen for paging messages addressed to the mobile wireless device from the second wireless network. The first wireless network suspends allocation of radio resources to the mobile wireless device based on receipt of a suspension message from the mobile wireless device, or based on knowledge of a paging cycle for mobile wireless device in the second wireless network, or based on detection of an out of synchronization condition with the mobile wireless device. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120270546 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE IDENTIFICATION AND ACQUISITION OF ACCESS POINTS - Systems, apparatus and methods for facilitating identification and/or acquisition of an access point are provided. Methods can include transmitting or receiving access point information (“API”) indicative of an identification of the access point (“AP”). The API can be provided at the AP through hardwiring or receipt of configuration information input by a user or transmitted to the AP by a network operator through Over-The-Air (“OTA”) signaling. The API can be computer-readable and, in some embodiments, the API can also be human-readable. The API can be transmitted on a paging channel from which user equipment (“UE”) can receive information. The frequency at which the API is transmitted can be fixed, dynamic and/or configurable. Upon receipt of the API, acquisition of the AP is attempted if the AP is determined to be a permitted AP. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120270547 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE OR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY, AND TERMINAL - The present invention discloses a mobility management method, a serving GPRS support node or mobility management entity (SGSN/MME), and a terminal to solve the problem of setting or dynamically modifying the mobility management frequency of a particular terminal among numerous terminals. The technical solution of the present invention includes: obtaining subscription data of a terminal, where the subscription data carries periodic routing area update or tracking area update (RAU/TAU) setting information; obtaining a periodic RAU/TAU timer of the terminal according to the periodic RAU/TAU setting information; sending the periodic RAU/TAU timer of the terminal to the terminal; and setting a value that is a little longer than the periodic RAU/TAU timer of the terminal as a mobile reachable timer for monitoring the periodic RAU/TAU of the terminal. The embodiments of the present invention may be applied in low-mobility machine-type communication. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120276899 | CELL REGISTRATION - A method for a mobile communications network where a cell is identifiable by a global identifier unique in the mobile communications network and/or a short identifier re-usable in another cell of the mobile communications network. A registry associates information representing a location within the coverage area of the mobile communications network to a defined group of short identifiers. When an access point sends a request for registration to provide services of a cell in a mobile communications network, the request includes information indicating a location of the access point. The registry is used to select a short identifier to be applied in a cell of an access point before registering the access point to provide services of a cell in the mobile communications network. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120282927 | IDLE MODE TRANSITION CONTROL METHOD IN A WIREBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of controlling a transition to an idle mode in an operation method for transitioning to an idle mode in a wideband wireless communication system, including: receiving an unsolicited deregistration response message including an action code instructing the terminal to transmit a deregistration request message for a transition to an idle mode and deregistration request message transmission time information from a base station; extracting control information in which a poll bit for reporting whether or not a message has been received is set from the received unsolicited deregistration response message; transmitting a deregistration request message including response information with respect to the extracted control information and a deregistration request code for requesting a transition to an idle mode, to the base station; and receiving a deregistration response message including an action code permitting a transition to an idle mode, | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120282928 | MOBILE SWITCHBOARD, MOBILE UNIT, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND POSITION-REGISTRATION EXTENDING METHOD - A mobile unit transmits a request for position registration to a network when moving from a first area to a second area. When the number of incoming calls does not exceed a threshold and the number of movements between the first area and the second area exceeds a threshold, a mobile switchboard combines the first area and the second area into an extended area, and informs the mobile unit of the extended area. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120289227 | GESTURE-BASED COMMANDS FOR A GROUP COMMUNICATION SESSION ON A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - In an embodiment, a user equipment (UE) detects that a user has made a pre-defined gesture that is associated with setting up a group communication session (GCS) with a communication group. The UE transmits a call request message to an application server to request set-up of the GCS. In another embodiment, the UE receives a user input requesting the UE to monitor for gestures by a user of the UE during the GCS. The UE then monitors one or more sensors during the GCS to detect whether the user of the UE has made a pre-defined gesture. In another embodiment, during the GCS, the UE detects that the user has made a pre-defined gesture, maps the detected gesture to a gesture-based command associated with transitioning the UE's floor-holder status and then transmits a request to facilitate the floor-holder status transition to the application server in accordance with the gesture-based command. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120289228 | AV Avatar System and Method for Interacting with Mobile Device - The present invention provides a system for use with a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device can provide a first registration communication, whereas the second communication device can provide a second registration communication and a location communication. The system includes a communication portion, a registration portion, a memory portion and a location portion. The communication portion can receive the first registration communication, the second registration communication and the location communication. The registration portion can generate first registration information based on the first registration communication and generate second registration information based on the second registration communication. The memory portion can store the first registration information and the second registration information. The location portion can generate location information based on the location communication, the first registration information and the second registration information. The communication portion can transmit the location information to the first communication device. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120289229 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile radio communication system having a mobile radio communication network and a mobile radio subscriber appliance, wherein a unit in the network layer of the core network of the mobile radio communication network is configured to transmit to the mobile radio subscriber appliance a first message, based on an occurrence of a predetermined event, with a request for a statement which describes at least one radio characteristic of the mobile radio subscriber appliance. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120295617 | SELECTIVELY EXTENDING A WAITING PERIOD BEFORE AN ORIGINATING USER EQUIPMENT FAILS A CALL BASED ON NETWORK INFORMATION OF ONE OR MORE TARGET USER EQUIPMENTS - In an embodiment, network information associated with a plurality of user equipments (UEs) is determined by an application server. For example, the network information can include information indicative of whether the respective UEs are connected to fast-response networks or slow-response networks. The application server receives a request from an originating UE to initiate a communication session to at least one target UE among the plurality of UEs. The application server selectively requests the originating UE to extend a wait timer based at least in part upon the determined network information for the at least one target UE, wherein expiration of the wait timer prompts the originating UE to fail the communication session. The originating UE receives the extension request from the application server and extends the wait timer such that call failure due to wait timer expiration is delayed and/or avoided. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120295618 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PROVISIONING OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for controlling provisioning of a wireless communication device in a cellular network may include maintaining, at a network component, a provisioning status database comprising status information corresponding to provisioning in a home location register of one or more wireless communication devices for one or more cellular networks. In addition, the methods and apparatus may include initiating provisioning or de-provisioning of a wireless communication device for a cellular network in the home location register in response to a triggering event. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120302236 | Method for Registering Communication Terminals with Base Station Devices by Using Virtual Appliances - A method for the registration of a communication terminal is provided. In some embodiments of the present invention, a communication terminal is registered with a base station by searching and executing a virtual appliance that contains base station software with which the communication terminal pre-subscribed. In some embodiments of the present invention, a communication terminal is registered as an endpoint device for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) uniform resource identifier (URI) when the communication terminal registers with the base station. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120302237 | CIRCUIT SWITCHING USER AGENT SYSTEM, COMMUNICATING DEVICE, AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD USED THEREFOR - A circuit switching user agent system includes a service processing device arranged in a home network of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem)/MMD (Multi-Media Domain). The circuit switching user agent system also includes a communication device arranged in a visited network where a mobile terminal has visited, the communication device having a function of interconversion between a UNI (User-Network Interface) signal in a circuit switching network to which the mobile terminal is connected and a signal used in the IMS/MMD. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120302238 | CIRCUIT SWITCHING USER AGENT SYSTEM, COMMUNICATING DEVICE, AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD USED THEREFOR - A circuit switching user agent system includes a service processing device arranged in a home network of an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem)/MMD (Multi-Media Domain). The circuit switching user agent system also includes a communication device arranged in a visited network where a mobile terminal has visited, the communication device having a function of interconversion between a UNI (User-Network Interface) signal in a circuit switching network to which the mobile terminal is connected and a signal used in the IMS/MMD. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120309393 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus includes memory that stores registration information that indicates a registered mobile terminal registered in a base station; and a processor configured to perform connection processing of connecting a non-registered mobile terminal to the base station, based on a connection request signal from the non-registered mobile terminal not stored in the memory; measure utilization of the base station by the non-registered mobile terminal for which the connection processing has been performed; and transmit obtained measurement results to another communication apparatus via a communication interface. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120315901 | CENTRALIZED CONTEXT AWARENESS THROUGH NETWORK ASSOCIATION - A user's context is determined based on the wireless network to which the user is connected. Targeted information, based on the determined context, is then delivered to the user. A centralized mechanism associates identifiers of wireless access points to one or more providers, such as retail establishments, that have set up those access points and have been registered by the centralized mechanism. The providers also provide targeted information that they wish to have delivered to users whose context indicates that they are in or near that provider's store. The centralized mechanism further has information associating the wireless computing device with contact information that can be utilized to deliver targeted information. The targeted information can be delivered to the user via the wireless network, a cellular network or through other communicational mechanisms. The provider, or retail establishment, can also be informed of the presence of the user near its premises. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120315902 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A wireless communication system includes: a first wireless communication terminal to register an external device, wherein a subscriber information management device transmits a location of the external device to the first wireless communication terminal based on a search result of the external device based on a search request for the external device, the search request being transmitted from the subscriber information management device to a second wireless communication terminal within a search target area, the second wireless communication terminal being identified by the subscriber information management device based on registration information including certain information and location information of the external device. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120315903 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, RELAY NODE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND STORAGE MEDIUM OF CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication processing system includes a user equipment, a base station and a relay node for relaying the user equipment and the base station. The relay node includes a timer unit which measures a prescribed time after detecting movement between tracking areas and a user equipment registration unit which registers the user equipment, which is a transmission source of a location registration request signal to a location information management unit, which manages location information, received by the relay node during the prescribed period, as a subordinate of the relay node. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120315904 | OPTIMIZED USER RE-DISTRIBUTION OVER S-CSCF ENTITIES - Embodiments of the present invention provide a network entity of an IMS network, in which a registered user is being served by an assigned Serving-Call Session Control Function, S-CSCF. The network entity includes a memory storing data that includes an identity of at least one better-matching S-CSCF in the IMS network having capabilities better suited for serving the registered user than the assigned S-CSCF. The network entity is configured to obtain an indication of the availability of the better-matching S-CSCF, and when the better-matching S-CSCF entity is available to initiate a transfer so that the registered user is served by the better-matching S-CSCF. The network entity may be the assigned S-CSCF, or may be an I-CSCF. Embodiments of the present invention provide a method of transferring a registered user to a better-matching S-CSCF. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120329456 | BEACON TRANSMISSION FOR A SET OF FEMTOCELLS - Transmissions of beacons by a set of access points (e.g., femtocells) are synchronized to facilitate discovery of the access points by an access terminal moving through the coverage areas of the access points. In some embodiments, periodic beacon transmissions are synchronized across all of the femtocells of a set of femtocells such that each femtocell transmits a beacon signal according to a similar pattern and at the same time. In some embodiments, an opportunistic beacon control scheme involves commencing beacon transmissions by at least one femtocell of a set of femtocells upon determining that an access terminal has communicated with one or more of the femtocells. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120329457 | METHOD FOR A SECURE DETACH PROCEDURE IN A RADIO TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention proposes a method for performing a detach of a terminal registered to a telecommunication network by associating an identification for said terminal, deriving a signature for said identification, and allocating a pair consisting of said identification and said signature to said terminal, said method comprising the steps of: sending a detach request including said identification and said identification signature from said registered terminal to said network; receiving said detach request at the network side; comparing said received detach request with a record of registration data of said terminal kept at the network side; and detaching said terminal from said network, if said received detach request coincides with said record of registration data. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20130005336 | PASSENGER MOBILE STATION REGISTRATION WITH A VEHICLE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM USING PASSENGER INFORMATION - A method for registering a mobile station of a passenger may include receiving a request to register the mobile station of the passenger with a passenger communications system on board a vehicle. The method may also include validating a personal or passenger identification number (PIN) for registration with the passenger communications system. The PIN may include at least a portion of a name of the passenger and seat information of the passenger. The method may additionally include registering the mobile station of the passenger with the passenger communications system in response to the PIN being validated. The method may further include providing a predetermined class of service to the passenger based on the PIN. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130005337 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PERFORM TIME ZONE DETERMINATION BY A MOBILE STATION - This application pertains to methods and apparatus to perform time zone determination by a mobile station. One example method for use in a device includes transmitting a messaging service message to a server via a communication network, the messaging service message to be used to determine a time zone for the device, and receiving the time zone for the device from the server. Other examples are shown and described. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130012204 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR PERFORMING DETACH PROCEDURE - Disclosed is a method for performing a detach procedure in a terminal. The method includes the steps of: receiving a detach request message from an entity within a network; if the type in the detach request message indicates “re-attach required”, stopping a first timer if the first timer is running; stopping a second timer if the second timer is running, and transmitting a detach accept message to the entity within the network. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130012205 | Systems and Methods for the Detection of Transmission Facilities - A method of detecting a transmitting device within an obstruction rich environment is disclosed. The method may involve detecting the transmitting device with a wireless transmission detection facility; communicating signal information relating to the detected transmitting device from the wireless transmission detection facility to a central unit; determining the location of the transmitting device; displaying information of the detection and location of the transmitting device through a user interface; and providing an action facility for causing actions related to the detected transmitting device. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130012206 | PAGING USER DEVICES IN A WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - Providing paging controls for mobile communication is described herein. By way of example, the paging controls can comprise paging occasions of a wireless signal determined from a formula based on an integer raised to a function of a constant power (e.g., 2̂K or 2̂(K−L), where K and/or L are constant). Selected paging occasions can be grouped within the wireless signal, or distributed throughout a subset of time frames of the signal. Furthermore, paging groups can be assigned to each of the paging occasions by employing distinct identifiers of mobile device assigned to each paging occasion. By employing various paging occasions and paging groups, false alarm pages can be mitigated. According to at least one aspect, system information can be efficiently broadcast to multiple devices (e.g., all devices in a cell) by employing at least one paging group assigned for cell-wide paging. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130012207 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR OVER-THE-AIR ACTIVATION - A method and system automatically activates a mobile station in a wireless communications network. The system includes an over the air activation function (OTAF) processor in the network that initiates an activation process in response to receiving a registration message from a mobile switching center serving the mobile station requesting the activation. Each mobile station has a unit of information stored into it at the time of its manufacture to enable it to request over the air activation. That unit of information is either the network routing address of the OTAF processor, or alternately, it is a value that is translatable into that address, either an OTAF ID number that is the same value for every mobile station or it is a sequentially serialized dummy value for the mobile identification number (a dummy MIN). | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130017829 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING OFFLINE INDICATION OF MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a mobile communication system and, more particularly, to a method for performing offline indication of a machine type communication (MTC) device in an MTC service. A network entity checks (or searches) whether or not an MTC device is out of monitoring or management because it is in an offline state. A network entity repeatedly transmits a signal for checking whether or not the UE is currently in an offline state to the UE during operation time of a timer, namely, during a detection time, or checks a signal (e.g., a message of an attach procedure, a message of a location registration procedure, and the like) transmitted by the UE during the detection time to check whether or not the UE is in an offline state. When the UE is checked to be in an offline state, the network entity informs an MTC server or an MTC user accordingly, to thus automatically manage a loss, malfunction, or the like, of the MTC device. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130017830 | GLOBAL PLATFORM FOR MANAGING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES - A method of operating a mobile wireless network comprising: receiving, by a provisioning server, a signal from a mobile wireless network specifying a location of a first mobile device having a first International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) and operating in the mobile wireless network under a first condition, the mobile wireless network including a plurality of mobile switching centers (MSCs) and a plurality of mobile devices operating in the mobile wireless network; provisioning the first IMSI in the first HLR based on a state transition rule from a first provisioning state to a second provisioning state; provisioning a second IMSI in the first HLR based on the state transition rule from a third provisioning state to the first provisioning state; and transmitting data identifying the second IMSI to the first mobile device to allow the first mobile device to operate in the mobile wireless network under a second condition. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130023267 | IDLE MODE ACCESS THROUGH ASSISTED DISCOVERY - One embodiment is directed to a method of cell selection/reselection. The method includes gathering discovery information of a secondary radio access technology (RAT) by listening to a single primary radio access technology (RAT). The method may further include performing cell selection/reselection using the discovery information. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130023268 | System and Method for Communications Device and Network Component Operation - A system and method for communications device and network component operation in an ID/Locator Split Based heterogeneous network is provided. A method for control node operation includes receiving an attach request, and attempting to authenticate/authorize the communications node. The attach request is a request from a communications node to attach to a heterogeneous network. The method also includes if the communications node authenticated/authorized successfully, causing an identification and a location to be assigned for the communications node, completing an attachment for the communications node, and transmitting information to the communications node. The method further includes if the communications node did not authenticate/authorize successfully, sending an attach reject message to the communications node. The identification and the location are separate values. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130029664 | SOURCE NODE AND ROUTER IN CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a content source node and a first content router and a second content router in a content centric network (CCN), and a communication method thereof. The technology described herein may reduce the updating of routing information due to a movement of a mobile source node and the corresponding overhead, thereby reducing a rate of using an overall network resource by adding routing information, that is, partially updating the routing information of the corresponding mobile source node for content routers on a route through which the mobile source node moves. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130029665 | METHOD OF CONFIGURING MODULES FOR IDENTIFYING USERS OF A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of configuring modules for identifying users of a telecommunication network able to cover a service area cut into a plurality of geographical sub areas, each identification module including an identification code stored in the module, the identification code including:—an operator identifier;—a user identification number; the method including assigning a part of the user identification number to the operator, the part being used for purposes other than identification of the user. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130035098 | UNIQUELY IDENTIFYING TARGET FEMTOCELL TO FACILITATE ACTIVE HAND-IN - A method for macrocell-to-femtocell hand-in includes: communicating a non-directed proximity request message from a femto-proxy system over an out-of-band (OOB) channel, the proximity request message configured to be received by any of a plurality of access terminals when in proximity to the femto-proxy system, the femto-proxy system comprising an OOB radio and a femtocell communicatively coupled with a core network element; receiving a proximity response message over the OOB link from an access terminal of the plurality of access terminals in response to the proximity request message, the proximity response message indicating that the access terminal is in proximity to the femto-proxy system; communicating a presence indication from the femtocell to a core network element indicating proximity of the access terminal to the femtocell; and facilitating active hand-in of the access terminal from a source macrocell of a macro network to the femtocell. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130040642 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF ALLOCATING NETWORK TEMPORARY IDENTITIES - The present invention discloses a method and system for allocating Network Temporary Identities. The method comprises: obtaining capability information of a Home NodeB; allocating information for performing identity allocation to the Home NodeB, according to the capability information; sending the allocated information for performing identity allocation to the Home NodeB, so that the Home NodeB implements network temporary identity allocation according to the information for performing identity allocation; wherein the different information for performing identity allocation corresponds to different Home NodeBs to implement the network temporary identity allocation. The technical solution disclosed by the present invention can reduce the implementation complexity of Home NodeB Gateway and the time delay. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130045739 | INTERACTIONS AMONG MOBILE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - One embodiment of the disclosure sets for a method for synchronizing multiple mobile devices in a wireless network, which includes the steps of calculating a time interval for a first mobile device to respond to a request, receiving timing information of the first mobile device, determining a first offset associated with the first mobile device based on the time interval and the timing information, receiving a first data stream including the timing information of the first mobile device, and inserting a first dataset into the first data stream based on the first offset before transmitting the first data stream. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130059582 | Adaptive User Equipment Registration for Communication Networks - A method, apparatus, and computer-readable medium for registration of a mobile communication device include receiving a tracking area update request from the mobile communication device. Determining if the mobile communication device is categorized as moving or stationary. Categorizing the mobile communication list as one of moving or stationary based on the tracking area update request. Transmitting a tracking area list and a timer value to the mobile communications device based on the categorizing of the mobile communication device and the tracking area update request. The tracking area list and timer value can also be based on other factors. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130059583 | Resource Allocation for Direct Terminal-to-Terminal Communication in a Cellular System - Resource allocation for direct terminal-to-terminal communication in a cellular system There are provided measures for resource allocation for direct terminal-to-terminal communication in a cellular system, said measures exemplarily including configuration of common resources for supporting direct communication between terminals across a predefined registration area including one or more cells of a cellular system, and control of an allocation of common resources for enabling direct communication between terminals across the predefined registration area. Said measures may exemplarily be applied for establishing terminal-to-terminal communication in LTE or LTE-Advanced cellular networks. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130059584 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MANAGING VOICE CALL AND IP MEDIA SESSIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and system for managing voice call and IP media sessions in a wireless communication environment are provided. The method includes determining whether a User Equipment (UE) is simultaneously performing a voice call session and at least one Internet Protocol (IP) media session over a first network cell associated with a first Radio Access Technology (RAT); continuing, if the UE is simultaneously performing the voice call session and the at least one IP media session, the voice call session over the first network cell and routing data streams associated with the at least one IP media session to the UE over a second network cell associated with a second RAT; and detaching, if the UE is not simultaneously performing the voice call session and the at least one IP media session, the UE from the first network cell associated with the first RAT. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130065585 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING LOCALIZED APPLICATIONS - Methods of wireless communication and wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) are described. A WTRU includes a processor. The processor determines a location of the WTRU and whether an application is available to the WTRU based on the determined location of the WTRU. On a condition that the application is determined to be available to the WTRU based on the determined location of the WTRU, the processor initiates a registration to an application service hosting the application. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130065586 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130072188 | METHOD, SYSTEM, TERMINAL AND NETWORK SIDE FOR TRIGGERING TERMINAL RESPONSE - The present invention discloses a method for triggering terminal response, including: after receiving a trigger message sent by a network side, a terminal sending an access request message to the network side; wherein, the access request message includes a trigger identification. The present invention discloses a system for triggering terminal response which realizes the above-mentioned method for triggering terminal response, a terminal and a network side at the same time. In the present invention, when the network side receives the access request message sent by the terminal, because the access request message carries the trigger identification, the network side can determine which trigger message is responded by the access request message according to the trigger identification carried in the access request message, thus deleting this trigger message stored by itself after the terminal accesses the server, and does not need to send the trigger for the terminal repeatedly. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130079003 | MAINTAINING NEIGHBOR CELL LIST - Access terminals are provisioned to conduct intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT measurements and report physical layer identifiers of detected cells. The provisioning may involve cycling through all or a portion of a defined superset of physical layer identifier one subset at a time. In addition, the physical layer identifiers may be prioritized to improve the search procedure. Measurement report messages (including physical layer identifiers of the detected cells) are received at an access point as a result of the provisioning. A neighbor cell list for the femtocell is maintained based on the received measurement report messages and, optionally, other information. This other information may related to, for example, one or more of: physical layer identifier information received from access terminals that register with the access point, physical layer identifier information received via network listen operations, information regarding co-located cells, or physical layer identifier information received from a network entity. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130079004 | SYSTEMS FOR FASTER ACCESS AND DOWNLOAD OF DIGITAL CONTENT IN MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICES USING CELLUAR NETWORK - A handheld wireless device makes a request for service from a server of a business on a global network, the request originating from the wireless device is automatically routed to the closest server of the business that is geographically closest to the location of the wireless device as determined by a GPS function in the device, or by a router server in the wireless network based on the group of cell towers being connected to by the wireless device, or based on the location of the wireless device in a global telephone network database, for faster access to the service and a response there from. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130079005 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NEIGHBOR CELL LIST OPTIMIZING SYSTEM, BASE STATION, NEIGHBOR CELL LIST UPDATING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A first mobile terminal group has a first measurement information transmitting means which measures radio quality of a second cell, and transmits measurement information to a first base station, a second mobile terminal group has a second measurement information transmitting means which measures radio quality of a first cell, and transmits measurement information to a second base station, and a neighbor cell list optimizing system has: a measurement information collecting means which collects the measurement information of the first and second cells; a reliability evaluating means which performs processing of evaluating reliability of the measurement information of the second cell; a priority calculating means which, when the reliability is a predetermined threshold or less, calculates a priority for registering the second cell in the neighbor cell list of the first cell based on the measurement information of the first cell; and a neighbor cell list updating means which performs control of determining a neighbor cell to be registered based on the priority, and updating the neighbor cell list. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130079006 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT AND A MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY THEREOF - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and method for establishing connection between a User Equipment (UE) and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) in the wireless communication system in which the data-centric terminal requests the mobility management entity for attachment and checks, when the mobility management entity responds, data-centric features supported by the mobility management entity. According to the present invention, it is possible to connect the data-centric terminal to the mobility management entity supporting the data-centric features of the corresponding data-centric terminal efficiently in the wireless communication system. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130084859 | Exchange of Information Via WIFI Infrastructure Using Wireless Devices - A system is provided for transmitting information to a user of a mobile communications device. The system includes a database for storing information items associated with a plurality of wireless networks, and a mobile device application operating on a mobile communications device. The mobile device application is for receiving an indication that the mobile communications device is within the operational radius of one of the wireless networks, and causing the transmission of a network identifier associated with one of wireless networks. The system also includes a transmission module for receiving the network identifier from the mobile device application and, in response thereto, transmitting one or more information items associated with an operator of the one of the plurality of wireless networks to the mobile communications device. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130084860 | MINIMAL ACCESS TRANSFER CONTROL FUNCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY HANDOVER - A method, apparatus, and computer readable medium is provided for a reverse single radio voice call continuity handover procedure, where an access transfer control function is only allocated dynamically during a call setup phase, if the access transfer control function is needed to support the reverse single radio voice call continuity handover procedure. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130095830 | WIRELESS ACCESS PROTOCOL AND PORTABLE TERMINAL DEVICE - As a result of ISR being enabled between a portable terminal device and a network which are capable of communicating by using the communication protocols of a plurality of wireless access technologies, the portable terminal device performs position registration processing between the plurality of wireless access technologies and the portable terminal device each time a fixed period of time elapses, and the portable terminal device is able to move between the plurality of wireless access technologies that have already been registered, without conducting new position registration processing. At this time, if there is a possibility of there being a difference in ISR states (activated or not activated) between the portable terminal device and the network, the portable terminal device ignores any instructions issued by the network for ISR to be enabled in the portable terminal device. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130102308 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC AGENT SELECTION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Various methods dynamic agent selection in a communications network are provided. One example method includes receiving a care-of address for a mobile node and determining a target home agent gateway device to operate as a home agent for the mobile node based on the care-of address for the mobile node. The example method also includes causing the mobile node to be notified of the target home agent gateway device in preparation to trigger a binding of the target home agent gateway device to a device associated with the care-of address. In this regard, at least one subsequent data session involving the mobile node may be routed to the target home agent with which registration has been performed. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130102309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATING TRANSMIT POWER OF A FEMTO NODE - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include calibrating transmit power of a femto node based on measuring one or more parameters related to usage of the femto node. The femto node can temporarily increase transmit power and analyze received measurement reports to determine a transmit power calibration. The femto node can additionally measure uplink received signal strength indicators over multiple time periods following handover of a user equipment (UE) to determine whether to increase transmit power to cover the UE. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130102310 | Method of and a Support Node for Requesting Registration of Stationary User Equipment in a Cellular Telecommunication System | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130102311 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PAGING MESSAGE FOR M2M DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of receiving a paging message in a wireless communication system is provided. A machine-to-machine (M2M) device monitors paging messages including a group paging message and an individual paging message, and receives both the group paging message and the individual paging message from a base station (BS). | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130109381 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE STATION | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130109382 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TERMINAL REGISTRATIONS | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130109383 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ENABLING A MOBILE TERMINAL TO BE DETECTED BY AT LEAST ONE BASE STATION | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130115947 | METHOD FOR INTEGRATING USER EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONS TO FEMTOCELL - A method for integrating UE functions to a femtocell is provided. The method comprises the following steps. The femtocell with a subscriber identity module (SIM) is activated. The femtocell reads the information of the SIM. Based on the information of the SIM, the femtocell registers to a core network via an Internet. The femtocell having successfully registered to the core network provides SMS service, MMS service or Call service. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130115948 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE SERVICE PROVIDERS - Configuring a mobile wireless communication device using a carrier service configuration profile selected from a set of stored carrier service configuration profiles. Carrier service configuration profiles are selected based on one or more combinations of identifier values stored in the mobile wireless communication device. Carrier service configuration profiles are priority ranked based on a specificity of the one or more combinations of identifier values. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130122905 | MANAGING THE OPERATION OF A MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One object of the present invention is o method for managing the operation of a Machine Type Communication MTC Device in a mobile communication system, said method comprising a step of: performing said management within a detach of the MTC Device from the mobile communication network. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130122906 | METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CELL BARRING IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method for controlling the access of a User Equipment (UE) to a public land mobile network (PLMN), the PLMN providing at least a service, the PLMN having at least one network cell, a control channel being broadcast within the network cell, includes: transmitting a barring factor information to the UE on the broadcast control channel within the network cell; transmitting a barring scaling information to the UE on a control channel independently of the barring factor information; and realizing, based on a combination of the barring factor information and the barring scaling information, an access control to the service with regard to the UE by deciding whether a specific access request of the UE to the service is accepted or rejected. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130130683 | MESSAGE SUBSCRIPTION, GENERATION, AND DELIVERY WITH DYNAMIC ZONES - Text, voice, and video messaging techniques and social networks are enhanced with geolocation and permissions information. Basic messaging has a publisher publishing a message and subscribers receiving the message. Permissions can limit the publisher to publishing only into certain geographic zones. Recipients within a zone receive the message and other people or devices do not. Recipients can choose to subscribe to additional geographic zones to thereby receive messages directed into that zone. Publisher and subscriber zones do not need to cover the same geographic areas. Zones can be predefined or can be dynamically created, perhaps on a per message basis. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130130684 | Group Procedures For Machine Typ Communication Devices - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities to optimize procedures relating to machine type communication devices. Individual UEs may be grouped together in order to optimize procedures relating to members of the group. For example, a group of UE devices may be predefined or a group may be configured by a network associated with the UEs. One or more of the members of the group may be designated as a special UE or a master UE. The special UE or master UE may perform an action on behalf of one or more members of the group. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130130685 | COMPACT BASE STATION DEVICE AND SIGNALING METHOD - Provided is compact base station device that reduces the processing load with an upper layer network device by reducing the amount of signaling with an upper layer network device. In the device, a CSG member management device ( | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130130686 | CONNECTION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, INFORMATION FORWARDING DEVICE, AND SERVER - A technique is disclosed for preventing a mobile terminal from unnecessarily connecting to a local connection service provided by a mobile router. In a communication system, a UE | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130137430 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REGISTRATION FOR APPLICATION PROGRAM DEPLOYMENT - A communication system includes a development sector for registering a plurality of wireless devices, a business sector for controlling utilization of an application program and for receiving application data, a service sector for deploying the application program and for providing the application data to the business sector in accordance with communication with at least one wireless device of the plurality; and a mobile sector comprising the plurality of wireless devices, each device for receiving the application program deployed by the service sector, executing the application program in response to the business sector, and communicating with the service sector to support provision of the application data to the business sector. Deployment of application programs may be controlled by the business sector or the development sector by rendering an application program or auxiliary device available for use only after a particular time or after receipt of a message. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130137431 | RELAY STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RELAY STATION - A mobile communication system includes at least one upper radio station ( | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130143559 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CORE NETWORK APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A in which an SGSN/MME determines whether to allow a UE to turn into an always-on state in which a bearer for a UE is always established in a core network when “Attach Request” or “RA Update Request/TA Update Request” is received from the UE, and a step B in which the SGSN/MME transmits always-on information indicating the determination result to the UE by using “Attach Accept” or “RA Update Accept/TA Update Accept”. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130143560 | METHOD, PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT, AND PROGRAM - A method for providing public land mobile network access to a User Equipment. A first identity or communication context information relates to the use of the User Equipment according to a first mode of operation, the first mode of operation being defined at least partly by a first configuration information stored in the User Equipment and being associated to a first network access priority. A second identity or communication context information relates to the use of the User Equipment according to a second mode of operation, the second mode of operation being defined at least partly by a second configuration information stored in the User Equipment and being associated to a second network access priority. At least partly during the operation of the User Equipment, the network access of the User Equipment occurs simultaneously using the first mode of operation and using the second mode of operation. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130150035 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLASSIFYING NEIGHBORING DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include classifying nearby devices as neighboring or non-neighboring devices. Devices can be classified based on detected registration attempts to a femto node, where the femto node can switch paging area identifiers to cause the registration attempts or otherwise, analyzing measurement reports received from the devices in a registration request, and/or the like. The femto node can mitigate interference to the devices based on the classification. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130150036 | Periodic Registration Updates For Multiple SIM User Equipment - Systems and methods are presented to support operation of a multiple subscriber identity module (SIM) device. A first SIM may perform a data transfer or voice call. During the first SIM's data transfer or voice call, transition times are identified to transition communication resources to a second SIM for use in performing a registration update communication with a network controller that supports the second SIM. The registration update communication may include a periodic location update, a periodic routing update, or a periodic tracking update. The multiple SIM device may identify the transition time by obtaining periodic registration timing information from the network controller, configuring a periodic registration timer based on the periodic registration timing information, and setting the transition time as an expiration time of the periodic registration timer. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130150037 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which a handover procedure is provided to allow a mobile device to transfer from a home base station connected to a core network via a home base station gateway to another base station not coupled via the home base station gateway. A novel extension to the handover procedure is provided in which the home base station gateway is informed of the transfer of the mobile device, allowing context and resources assigned to the mobile device at the base station gateway to be released. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130157658 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CLASSIFYING USER EQUIPMENT AND SELECTING TRACKING AREAS - Some embodiments disclose a method for providing a tracking area identity list in a communications network. The method includes maintaining a tracking area transition likelihood and a tracking area group transition likelihood, and recording a mobility number and a paging number. The method further includes determining a category associated with the user equipment device based on the recorded mobility number and the recorded paging number, and generating the tracking area identity list for the user equipment device based on the category associated with the user equipment device and one or both of the tracking area transition likelihood and the tracking area group transition likelihood. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130157659 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - A base station device includes a processing unit that performs a base station process on a mobile terminal and a core network device; a cellular communication unit for connection to the mobile terminal; and a connection control unit, wherein the cellular communication unit receives a connection request message for connection to an external network from the mobile terminal, the base station processing unit replaces an access point name of the connection request message with “APN-L” and transfers the connection request message to a mobility management entity when the access point name indicating a local network is other than APN-L, and the connection control unit performs a radio bearer setting process between the mobile terminal and the connection control unit, based on a context setup request message in which the “APN-L”, having a bearer established, received from the mobility management entity is stored. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130157660 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is presented in which a base station is provided for communicating with a plurality of mobile communication devices in a cellular communication system. The base station operates one of more communication cells and communicates subframes, with each of the plurality of communication devices within the cell(s), each comprising the communication resources of a control region for communicating a control channel and the communication resources of a data region for communicating a respective data channel. The base station communicates a control channel having a first DMRS sequence in a control region of some subframes and a control channel having a second DMRS sequence in a control region of other subframes. The second control channel may be transmitted in a radio beam focussed spatially in a direction of a communication device. The first control channel may be transmitted omnidirectionally throughout the cell(s). | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130165116 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING SERVICE CENTRALIZATION AND CONTINUITY AND METHOD THEREOF - Mobile communication system supporting service centralization and continuityand method thereof. A mobile communication system may include a home subscriber server and a service centralization and continuity application server. The mobile subscriber server may be configured to register a location of a user equipment and to transmit location registration information of the user equipment. The service centralization and continuity application server may be configured to receive the location registration information of the user equipment from the home subscriber server. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130165117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING A COMPUTING DEVICE WITH A SERVICE PROVIDER - A method and apparatus for providing authentication of a computing device with a communications service. A subscriber identity module image is transmitted to the device and stored in a general memory of the device and soft SIM data. A secure module on the device permits access to the soft SIM data. The Soft SIM data is registered with the service provider in association with a unique identification of the device. The soft SIM data has a one to one relationship with the device. A device can have many instances of soft SIM data. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130165118 | CONTEXT-RETENTION CONTROLLER AND METHOD FOR CONTEXT RETENTION IN WIRLESS ACCESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of a context-retention controller and method for retaining context in a wireless access network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the context-retention controller may assign a context identifier to a mobile device at network entry for context retention. A disconnection and context-retention request may be received from a base station to trigger entry of the mobile station into a context-retention mode. The base station may generate the disconnection and context-retention request upon an indication of a disconnection of the mobile device from the wireless access network. The context-retention controller may maintain context for the mobile device in a context-retention database after disconnection of the mobile device from the wireless access network. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130171990 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING TRIGGERLESS EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER (EIR) SERVICE IN A DIAMETER NETWORK - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing triggerless EIR service in a Diameter network. One method includes steps performed at a Diameter routing agent (DRA). The steps include, receiving a registration or authentication information request at the DRA. The steps further include performing, by the DRA, an EIR lookup in response to the registration or authentication information request message. The method further includes, relaying the registration or authentication information request message to a home subscriber server (HSS) or a home location register (HLR) or responding on behalf of the HSS or HLR based on results of the EIR lookup. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130171991 | BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a call connection acceptance determination unit that determines, when a call connection request signal from the user terminal is received, whether a call connection request from the user terminal is acceptable, based on an amount of resources that is used by the base station; a redirection-setting unit that sets, when the call connection acceptance determination unit determines that the call connection request from the user terminal is not to be accepted, a different base station to which the user terminal is to be redirected; and a notification unit that reports information representing the different base station that is set by the redirection-setting unit to the user terminal. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130178205 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO ENHANCE BATTERY LIFE IN CELL PHONE DEVICES - A system that enhances life of a battery in cell phone devices that work in conjunction with a cellular telephone network has a Registration-Request Signal transmission management function that operates in the device and periodically detects change in physical location of the device from an immediate prior location, called an LchangeDelta. The function, if the LchangeDelta is below a threshold of change in location, suppresses an Registration-Request Signal transmission from the device to the cellular network, thus enhancing battery life | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130178206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENT OPERATION OF CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A cellular communication network has a mobile switching center (MSC) that maintains a GPS location data of a mobile handset referenced by a mobile identification number (MIN) and an electronic serial number (ESN) in addition to a geographic cell number in an HLR database for handsets operating in the network. The GPS location data of the handset may be used for efficient paging to a specific cell to route incoming calls to the handset, route emergency responder calls with the physical location of the handset and to program the handset with the handset transmission strength to the nearest cell tower In lieu of using triangulation algorithm. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130178207 | COMBINED BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND BASE STATION CONTROLLER OPTIMIZED ASSIGNMENT OF FRAME OFFSETS - A system, method, and computer readable medium for managing an availability of a call agent, comprising acquiring a session identification by a basestation (BS) and a call agent (CA), wherein the BS is coupled to the CA, if the CA's state is changed from an active state to a standby state, requesting a new connection with the BS; and after the new connection is established between the CA and the BS, sending another session identification from the CA to the BS. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130183967 | Lawful Intercept Of Mobile Units In Proximity To A Target Mobile Unit - A method for performing lawful intercept of mobile units in proximity to a target mobile unit is provided. A first mobile unit to target is identified. A geographical area about the first mobile unit is defined. Wireless networks record any other mobile units that enter the geographical area and report these mobile units to a law enforcement agency. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130183968 | Method For Mobility Management In A System Architecture Supporting Mobility Between Different Access Systems - A method for Mobility Management MM in a system architecture supporting mobility between different access systems having separate Core Network CN-level MM entities while using common MM Area, the method comprising a step of: when a User Equipment UE leaves the coverage of a first one of the access systems where it is in a Non Radio Connected state as seen from Radio Access Network RAN, but seen in Connected State from CN-level MM entity, for the coverage of a second one of the access systems where it is in Idle state as seen from CN-level MM entity, putting the UE into Idle state as seen from CN-level MM entity of said first access system. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130183969 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING LOCATION UPDATE REGISTRATION PROCESS IN MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting a location update registration process used for an idle mode operation of a Mobile Station (MS) in a Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication are provided. The method includes determining whether a system global location update registration timer is applied to the MS, when it is determined that the global location update registration timer is not applied, determining a timer for updating a location when the MS operates in an idle mode, and transmitting a message including the timer to the MS. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130189979 | ENHANCEMENT FOR POWER-DOWN SEQUENCE - When a cellular telephone is powered down, it sends a power-down message to a network it was registered with. If the cellular telephone does not receive an acknowledgement of the power-down message from the network, a flag is set in the cellular telephone. The power-down sequence is concluded by the cellular telephone, and the cellular telephone is shut off or put into a reduced power consumption state. When the telephone is turned back on the flag is evaluated to see if it was set during the course of powering down. The status of the flag when the phone is powered up is then used by the cellular telephone to determine whether it should make a network access request to a network the telephone was registered to, during the power-up operation in order to cause that cellular network to update its database regarding the whereabouts of the powered-up cellular telephone. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130189980 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VOICE CALL SETUP FROM A PCH OR FACH STATE - A method at a user equipment for establishing a circuit switched call, the user equipment being in a Cell Forward Access CHannel (CELL_FACH) state, a Cell Paging CHannel (CELL_PCH) state or a UTRAN Registration Area Paging CHannel (URA_PCH) state, the method receiving an indication that a circuit switched call is pending, sending to a network element a message to facilitate the user equipment to transition to a Cell Dedicated CHannel (CELL_DCH) state, the message being a Traffic Volume Measurement Report indicating uplink data traffic exceeds a predetermined threshold; and establish the circuit switched call. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130203411 | METHOD OF PERFORMING ATTACH PROCEDURES - A user equipment is configured to perform an attach procedure by camping on a specific PLMN using a specific RAT. When receiving an attach reject due to a specific reject cause, the user equipment is configured to perform the attach procedure by camping on the specific PLMN using another RATs. When the attach procedure after RAT reselection fails, the user equipment is configured to perform the attach procedure by camping on another PLMN using one or multiple RATs. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130203412 | IDENTIFIERS AND TRIGGERS FOR CAPILLARY DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses for capillary network device registration implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) are disclosed. Registration or bootstrap messages may be received by a capillary network device where the WTRU acts as a gateway for communication between the capillary device and a network such as a 3GPP network. A capillary network device identifier (CNDID) is sent to the capillary device. A packet data protocol (PDP) context or PDN connection may be established with the network and the CNDID may be sent to a machine type communications (MTC) server. The WTRU may create the registration message, establish a connection with the network, and forward the registration message to the MTC server. Methods and apparatuses implemented in a network are also disclosed for identifying, addressing, and triggering the capillary devices from the MTC server. The trigger message may include fields for group communication, reducing signaling, and enabling charging. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130203413 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING WIRELESS DEVICES - Wireless discovery is the process in which a service or application is located by a wireless station on a network, usually after the station has established a connection with the network. Wireless pre-association refers to the process of describing an application or service by its hardware/software interoperability requirements and/or a unique identifier prior to a connection being established between two or more wireless stations. A method performs wireless discovery between two or more wireless stations by communicating a data string between a wireless station and another wireless station, prior to a connection having been established between the wireless station and another wireless station, the data string including interoperability information necessary for a service or an application to run on a wireless station receiving the data string. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130203414 | Mobile Terminal Registration Method in a Radio Network - A mobile terminal registration method in a radio network includes: a. A mobile terminal sending a non-access stratum message and identifier information of last registration to a radio access network unit, and the identifier information comprising the Serving CN Node identifier, Serving CN Node pool identifier and Public Land Mobile Network Identifier; b. If the radio access network unit determines that the identifier information is invalid, the radio access network unit allocating a Serving CN Node to the mobile terminal and sending the non-access stratum message to the Serving CN Node; c. After the Serving CN Node receives the non-access stratum message, if determining that a registration request of mobile terminal can be accepted, the Serving CN Node sending a success response message to the mobile terminal, and the message carrying identifier information of current Serving CN Node; d. The mobile terminal saving the new identifier information. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130203415 | METHOD FOR ASSOCIATING A TRACKING AREA IDENTITY LIST WITH A USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method comprises: associating a first tracking area identity list with a user equipment during registration with a core network node; sending the first tracking area identity list to the user equipment; and receiving at least one tracking area identity comprising the tracking area identity of a tracking area being used by the user equipment. The method further comprising: compiling an second tracking area identity list based on the tracking area identity list currently associated with the user equipment and on the received at least one tracking area identity; and in response to the second tracking area identity list containing a different set of tracking area identities than the tracking area identity list currently associated with the user equipment, sending the second tracking area identity list to the user equipment to replace an earlier tracking area identity list. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130210430 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PAGING MESSAGE PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A paging message processing method is capable of handling paging message processing delay in handover from a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) network to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network. A Mobile Switching Center (MSC) includes determines, when an inbound call occurs, whether a Mobility Management Entity (MME) system exists; transmits, when no MME exists, a paging message over an IU interface; determines, when no response message is received, whether a location registration request is received form the MME; transmits, when the location registration request is received, a location registration response to the MME system to deliver the paging message via the MME system; and processes, when a paging response is received, the inbound call. In a heterogeneous network handover from a WCDMA network to an LTE network, the MSC hands over the paging procedure control to the MME immediately so as to facilitate processing the inbound call. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130210431 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD - With this transmission power control method, in a radio base station apparatus ( | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130210432 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OPERATION CONTROL METHOD, AND LOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVER - A communication system according to an exemplary aspect of the present invention is a communication system including a location management server for managing the location of a mobile station, a base station for deciding an exchange which accommodates the mobile station via the base station in response to a location registration request from the mobile station and making the location registration request to the exchange decided, and an exchange for making the location registration request to the location management server in response to the location registration request from the base station, wherein the location management server designates an exchange for accommodating the mobile station in response to the location registration request. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130210433 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving System Information (SI) of a femto base station in a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, an SI transmission point is determined using unique identification information of a femto base station itself and unique identification information of a macro base station with which the femto base station is associated. Each of user equipment and the macro base station generate a measurement gap pattern representing an SI reception point using the unique identification information of the femto base station and the unique identification information of the macro base station. SI is received from the femto base station according to the generated measurement gap pattern. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130217387 | PROXIMITY-BASED ONLINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a proximity-based online communication system comprising a plurality of GPS-enabled remote terminals registered therewith enabling the remote terminals to communicate with one another over at least one communication network when logged thereinto, a GPS module in communication with the GPS component of each remote terminal so as to receive the current geographic location of each remote terminal, the GPS module comprising a GPS database comprising the information of the distances between any two geographical locations, and a processor for enabling a remote terminal to limit the communication thereof to the fellow remote terminals that are within a degree of proximity therefrom wherein, the degree of proximity is set by the user of the remote terminal that initiates the communication and wherein, the fellow remote terminals that are within the degree of proximity are identified by the GPS module. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130217388 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER - A method and an apparatus for identifying a UE in an SAE network, and an MME are provided herein. The method includes: receiving an SAE-TMSI which is allocated to a UE that accesses an SAE network and includes at least: a pool-ID, an MME-ID, and a UE temporary identifier; using the SAE-TMSI to temporarily identify the UE in the SAE network. The apparatus includes: a receiving unit and a temporary identifying unit. The MME includes a temporary identifier allocating unit. Moreover, a method for transmitting and allocating a temporary identifier, and a method for receiving and transmitting information according to the temporary identifier are disclosed herein. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130217389 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING A USER EQUIPMENT TO A NETWORK DEVICE VIA A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for connecting a user equipment to a network device via a mobile communication network wherein the equipment includes at least a deregistered and a registered state, the deregistered state including at least a normal and an attempting-to-attach substate, for defining a connectivity state of the equipment to the mobile communication network, the equipment being connectable to the mobile communication network and the network device being connected to the mobile communication network includes:
| 08-22-2013 |
| 20130225166 | INDOOR PERSONAL RELAY - The embodiments herein disclose an indoor personal relay which has a wireless interface with the BS, which is effective in both cost and technology terms. The indoor personal relay, as disclosed herein is an estimate and forward relay. The relay | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130225167 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXPANDING FEMTOCELL COVERAGE FOR HIGH CAPACITY OFFLOAD - Systems and methods are provided for deploying a femto node with expanded coverage. This may be achieved, for example, by operating a femto node in an open or hybrid access mode to allow registration from both member and non-member devices, monitoring conditions on a backhaul link maintained with a wireless network over a broadband connection configured to provide internet access to the devices and to other devices operating independent of the femto node, and managing resources or mobility for each device based on whether the device is a member device or a non-member device and based on the conditions over on the backhaul link. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130225168 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATION IDENTIFICATION DISCOVERY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are provided for facilitating base station identity discovery in a wireless communications system. This may be achieved, for example, by exchanging with a User Equipment (UE) a message including a Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) of the UE, wherein the U-RNTI comprises an indicator representative of a base station identifier of a Home NodeB (HNB) associated with the UE. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130231112 | METHOD FOR TRIGGERING JOINT REGISTRATION PERFORMED BY LTE SINGLE-CARD DUAL-STANDBY MULTI-MODE TERMINAL, AND TERMINAL - Embodiments of the present invention relates to a method for triggering joint registration performed by an LTE single-card dual-standby multi-mode terminal, and a terminal, so as to solve a technical problem in the prior art that LTE network registration and 2G/3G network registration are separately performed so the power consumption of the terminal is increased. The joint registration method includes: determining, by a terminal, a location area identity of a 2G/3G network in which registration is to be performed; and, sending, by the terminal, an attach request message to a mobile management entity of an LTE network, where the attach request message contains the location area identity, so as to trigger the joint registration which is in the LTE network and the 2G/3G network and is performed together by the terminal and the mobile management entity of the LTE network. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130231113 | Operational Parameter Selection to Avoid Interference in a Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication device uses operational parameters stored in a capabilities list to control operation of the device. The device may also provide auxiliary services, such as reception of broadcast television signals and location detection using network assisted GPS. When auxiliary services are selected, the cellular operation may cause interference with the auxiliary services. The wireless communication device includes a reduced set of capabilities to control operation of the wireless communication device when an auxiliary service is requested. The particular set of reduced capabilities may depend on the specific type of auxiliary service that has been requested. Upon termination of the auxiliary services, the full capabilities list may be restored and the operation of the wireless communication device is thereafter controlled by the full set of operational capabilities. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130237223 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for a User Terminal - A method including detecting a preference of a user terminal for a predetermined service, detecting that the current RAT does not provide the predetermined service: monitoring whether another PLMN or RAT of the first PLMN is available; upon detecting that no other PLMN or RAT of the first PLMN is available, maintaining connection to the first RAT of the first PLMN until another PLMN or RAT in the first PLMN becomes available; upon detecting that another PLMN or RAT is available, considering the first RAT of the first PLMN as disabled, and generating an information element to a memory according to which the first RAT of the first PLMN has been marked as disabled, wherein the information element is valid until a predetermined criterion is met and at least beyond a point of time when the user terminal switches to another PLMN and/or to another RAT. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130237224 | BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a connection processing unit that performs connection processes between user terminals registered in a user terminal registration unit and the base station, and between user terminals other than the user terminals registered in the user terminal registration unit and the base station; a resource amount measurement unit that measures an amount of resources utilized by the base station; and a call disconnection user terminal selecting unit that selects, when the resource amount measurement unit measures that the amount of the resources is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the user terminal for which a call is to be disconnected, among the user terminals other than the user terminals registered in the user terminal registration unit. The connection processing unit disconnects a connection with the user terminal for which the call is to be disconnected. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130244648 | ACCESS POINT COMMUNICATION BASED ON TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPLE PHYSICAL LAYER IDENTIFIERS - Information is communicated between access points to cause a recipient access point to invoke an action. In some aspects, a mapping is defined between: 1) sets of physical layer identifiers and/or associated time offsets; and 2) different types of information. The mapping information is provided to access points in a wireless communication system such that an access point can use this scheme to communicate specified types of information to another access point. Based on the mapping, an access point that receives a set of physical layer identifiers from another access point is able to determine the type of information being communicated. The recipient access point may then invoke a specific action based on the type of information that was communicated. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130244649 | Method of Transferring Short Message Service - A method of transferring a short message service (SMS) to a communication device in a wireless communication system comprises a network of the wireless communication system not activating an idle-mode signaling reduction (ISR) mode for the communication device when the network applies only PS domain registration for the SMS for the communication device. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130244650 | NOTIFICATIONS BASED ON DEVICE PRESENCE - An architecture is provided that can facilitate and/or transmit notifications based upon device presence techniques in connection with a wireless communications network. For example, when certain mobile devices register with a particular network entity (e.g., a femtocell) that services a particular target location (e.g., place of residence), then such registration can be leveraged to indicate presence at the target location. Accordingly, notifications can be delivered to custodian devices that indicate the presence information if certain predetermined conditions or criteria are satisfied. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130244651 | METHOD FOR PARTITIONING CELL IDENTITIES ACCORDING TO CELL TYPE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method of transmitting a cell type information, which is transmitted by a base station in a wireless communication system, is disclosed. The present invention includes broadcasting a boundary point information (Z) between a cell identity of a public ABS (advanced base station) and a cell identity of a private ABS via an S-SFH SP3 (secondary-super frame header subpacket3). In this case, the boundary point information (Z) is a range information of cell identity partitions partitioned by granularity of 10 sequences or 20 sequences per segment and a total number of the cell identity partitions is 16. Further, the range information of cell identity partitions includes information that all cell identities are cell identities of the private ABS or information that all cell identities are cell identities of the public ABS except for cell identities of a macro ABS. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130244652 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method in which a terminal performs network reentry procedures in an idle mode in a wireless access system, wherein the method comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, control information indicating an initial ranging back-off window size for machine-to-machine (M2M) terminals during a paging listening period; determining an initial ranging back-off window size for initial ranging using the received control information; and performing initial ranging procedures with the base station based on the determined initial ranging back-off window size. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130252609 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TERMINAL REGISTRATION WITH A REGISTRATION SERVER - Access terminals are adapted to communicate with registration servers to enable a registration server to perform timer-based registrations on behalf of an access terminal. The access terminal can cease performing such timer-based registrations as long as the registration server performs the registrations, and may power down until event data is available for transmission or reception. When a registration server performs timer-based registrations on behalf of an access terminal, the registration server can periodically communicate with a network entity to conduct the timer-based registrations for the access terminal. The network entity can receive a timer-based registration message from a registrations server for registering an access terminal. In response to such a message, the network entity can register the access terminal. Sensors and controllers may be used with some embodiments to collect and analyze data and for potentially taking action. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130252610 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method in which an M2M device transceives data to/from a base station in a wireless access system. The method comprises: a step of receiving, from the base station, a first message containing an available interval or an M2M device ID shared among M2M devices, and an M2M device ID use period in which said available interval periodically repeats; and a step of transceiving data to/from the base station using the M2M device ID in the available interval. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130260754 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR POWER CONTROL USING SMALL BASE STATIONS - In a wireless communication system including a small base station and a macro base station, the small base station to perform power control may include: a user detector to detect a presence of a user terminal by monitoring whether a registration state of the user terminal served by the small base station corresponds to a registration complete state, a registration maintain state, or a registration release state; a control signal generator to generate a control signal for controlling power of at least one power device among a plurality of power devices included in a predetermined group, based on the detection result; and a control signal transmitter to transmit the control signal to the at least one power device among the plurality of power devices. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130260755 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR POWER CONTROL USING SMALL BASE STATIONS - In a wireless communication system, a base station to perform power control may include: a user detector to detect a presence of a user terminal by monitoring whether a registration state of the user terminal served by the base station corresponds to a registration complete state, a registration maintain state, or a registration release state; a control signal generator to generate a control signal for controlling power of at least one power device among a plurality of power devices included in a predetermined group, based on the detection result; and a control signal transmitter to transmit the control signal to the at least one power device among the plurality of power devices. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130260756 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A MOBILE STATION COMMUNICATING WITH A COMMUNICATION NETWORK, AND ASSOCIATED MOBILE STATION - A communication method for a mobile station communicating with a communication network and an associated mobile station are provided, wherein the mobile station has a first subscriber identity and a second subscriber identity. The method includes: sending a connection setup request for registration of the first subscriber identity; sending a connection setup request for registration of the second subscriber identity; and receiving paging messages targeted at either the first subscriber identity or the second subscriber identity at paging blocks with the same block index. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130267227 | LOCATION-BASED MICROCELL SEARCH - A network device may be configured to receive information regarding a location of a user device; compare the location of the user device to one or more coverage areas associated with each of one or more cells that are associated with a base station of a wireless telecommunications network; determine that the user device is within a particular coverage area of a particular cell, of the one or more cells; and instruct the user device, based on determining that the user device is within the particular coverage area of the particular cell, to connect to the particular cell. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130267228 | POSITION SEARCH SYSTEM, A MOBILE INFORMATION TERMINAL, A POSITION SEARCH METHOD AND A RECORDING MEDIUM WHICH RECORDS A POSITION SEARCH PROGRAM | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130273914 | LOCATION BASED NETWORK SELECTION - The present invention relates to location based network selection in a mobile terminal moving (A to H) in a wireless communication environment set up of a home network in a home country having a border and at least one foreign network achieving radio coverage at least in part of the geographical area of the home country. A position (A to H) of the mobile terminal is monitored. Then, a network selection mode is automatically switched from a home network selection mode, enabling registration only to the home network, to an automatic network selection mode when the mobile terminal crosses the border from the home country to the foreign country. The network selection mode is switched back to the home network selection mode when the mobile terminal is again located in the home country. Thus, as long as the mobile terminal is located in the home country, it does never select any other network than the home network. When located abroad, automatic network selection applies. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130288678 | FEMTOCELL SERVICE REGISTRATION, ACTIVATION, AND PROVISIONING - A femto cell service framework is employed for registration, activation, and provisioning of femtocell service. An account management service enables femtocell account creation, and registration thereof. Registration includes validation of wireless coverage for a location of operation of a femto AP, and validation of availability enhanced 911 (E911) service. As part of registration provisioning, record(s) are updated to indicate registration status. Connection of femto AP to a network interface triggers activation process; the femto AP delivers an activation request. A femto network validates registration of the connected femto AP and conducts a location tolerance check of a received actual location of the femto AP and a registered location. Upon tolerance validation, a cell identifier and radio frequency channel(s) are assigned to femto AP. When femto AP radiates wireless signal, network activation status indicators are provisioned. Handling of errors that arise during registration or activation is provided. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130288679 | METHOD FOR RESTRICTING THE CELL ACCESS OF A TERMINAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present application relates to a method in which a terminal performs a cell access procedure in a wireless communication system. More particularly, the method comprises: a step of receiving, from a first cell, a message including one or more access-restricting network identifiers or one or more access-restricting area identifiers: a step of restricting, for a predetermined period of time, access to at least one second cell belonging to the network corresponding to said one or more access-restricting network identifiers or the area corresponding to said one or more access-restricting area identifiers, as well as access to said first cell; and a step of restarting access to the first cell and to said at least one second cell after said predetermined period of time elapses. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130295929 | TELEPHONE CALL CO-PROCESSING IN FOR MOBILE TELEPHONES - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and computer program product for telephone call co-processing in a mobile telephony environment. In an embodiment of the invention, a method of telephone call co-processing in a mobile telephony environment is provided. The method includes monitoring a resource state of a selected mobile telephone, such as cellular network signal strength or battery charge. The method additionally includes detecting weakness of the resource state sufficient to inhibit the maintenance of a telephone call in the selected mobile telephone. Finally, the method includes, in response to detecting weakness of the resource state, identifying a different mobile telephone proximate to the selected mobile telephone and utilizing the different mobile telephone to process a telephone call. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130295930 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS FOR HANDLING A COMBINED ATTACH OR ROUTING AREA UPDATE PROCEDURE SUCCESSFUL FOR PS DOMAIN SERVICES ONLY - A communication device is provided with a wireless module and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a service network. The controller module performs a combined attach or RAU procedure by transmitting an attach or RAU request message to the service network via the wireless module, and receives an attach or RAU accept message for the combined attach or RAU procedure, which includes a reject cause for CS domain services, from the service network via the wireless module. Also, the controller module prohibits retrying the combined attach or RAU procedure to obtain the CS domain services, in response to the attach or RAU accept message including the reject cause for the CS domain services. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130295931 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER OF UE - The present invention discloses a method for handover of User Equipment (UE) a service connection being made via the UE, comprises: if fast cells are set up as base stations starts up, handover from a normal cell to a first fast cell with a radio bearer set up therein when the UE moving speed exceeds a threshold, set up a same radio bearer at a current fast cell as the radio bearer set up at the first fast cell when the UE is leaving the first fast cell for the current fast cell adjacent to the first fast cell, release the radio bearer at the first fast cell after the UE leaves the first fast cell, and re-registering into an adjacent normal cell when the service connection is terminated, or handover to the adjacent normal cell from the current fast cell when the measured moving speed of the UE is below the threshold. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130295932 | HNB GATEWAY DEVICE, FEMTOCELL SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF OPERATING HNB-GW USED FOR SAME WITH REDUCED ELECTRIC POWER - Provided is an HNB gateway device capable of, while in an operation in a sleep mode, deactivating function units other than functions units associated with a mode check message and a sleep mode release request message from another HNB-GW, and thereby enabling a power saving operation. An HNB gateway device ( | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130303164 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSPORTING LOCATION REGISTRATION RESULT INFORMATION - A method and device for transmitting a location registration result of a portable terminal that is adapted for connected with two or more networks includes transmitting to a first network a location registration request message for location registration, receiving a location registration rejection message including location registration rejection information from the first network when the location registration fails, and transmitting to a second network a location registration request message including the location registration rejection information. The second network can notify the portable terminal when a re-attempted connection with the first network can be performed to save on processing power for repeated re-connection attempts with the first network that will not be successful. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130310034 | Systems, Methods, and Computer Program Products for Managing Access to Femtocell Coverage - Systems, methods, and computer program products are for managing access to a femtocell coverage area. An exemplary method includes storing in a memory component a first identifier corresponding to a subscribed service of a communication device and a second identifier corresponding to a user of the communication device, and granting access to the femtocell coverage area using the second identifier. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130310035 | Subscriber Identity Switch of a Communication Terminal - A method of switching subscriber identity between a first and second telecommunication stack of a multiple subscriber identity communication terminal is disclosed. The method comprises initiating a switch for a first subscriber identity from the first telecommunication stack to the second telecommunication stack and for a second subscriber identity from the second telecommunication stack to the first telecommunication stack. It is determined whether a value of at least one network related parameter associated with the first subscriber identity in the first telecommunication stack corresponds to a value of a corresponding at least one network related parameter associated with the first subscriber identity in the second telecommunication stack. Network registration of the first subscriber identity is performed only if the value of the at least one network related parameter associated with the first subscriber identity in the first telecommunication stack does not correspond to the value of a corresponding at least one network related parameter associated with the first subscriber identity in the second telecommunication stack. Corresponding computer program product, controller, arrangement, and multiple subscriber identity communication terminal are also disclosed. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130316705 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR EFFICIENT NETWORK DISCOVERY - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments of the invention are disclosed to improve the discovery of wireless networks having desired service offerings. In an example embodiment of the invention, a method comprises: broadcasting a wireless generic advertisement service request to a plurality of wireless devices, including an indication that a single response is sufficient; and receiving one or more wireless generic advertisement service responses from only one or more of a plurality of wireless devices in response to the indication that a single response is sufficient. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130316706 | PREDICTIVE PAGING BASED ON MOBILITY HISTORY AND MOVEMENT PATTERNS - A method and apparatus for efficient paging of user equipment (UE) in an LTE network is disclosed. In addition to storing the Last Seen eNodeB (LSeNB) for each UE attached to a mobility management entity (MME), the MME also maintains an LSeNB List of the eNodeBs seen immediately before the LSeNB for each UE. When a notification for a UE arrives at the MME, then MME can select from several paging methods, including paging only the LSeNB to locate the UE and sending a paging request LSeNB as well as to the list of eNodeBs seem immediately before the LSeNB. The MME can send a paging request to more than a single eNodeB but less than a full Tracking Area. Efficient paging is especially needed for voice over internet protocol (VoIP) calls where a call will go to voice mail if a page isn't answered quickly. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130316707 | MOBILE TERMINAL, VEHICULAR DEVICE, AND PORTABLE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile terminal displays, in a common format, a first list for a first registered facility information, which is managed by a database in a memory unit of the mobile terminal itself, and a second list for a second registered facility information, which is managed by a database in an external server. An operation input unit of the mobile terminal receives an input of a switch operation for switching between the first and second list for displaying information on a display unit. A control unit of the mobile terminal controls the display unit by changing the display of the registered facility information on the display unit according to the input of the switch operation from the operation input unit. The control unit controls the display unit to have the registered facility information from different databases displayed in a common format. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130316708 | Network Elements, Cellular Communication System and Methods Therefor - Location presence information is provided to advertising services by a femto-cell management system in a femto/pico-cell environment. On registration of a user equipment with a pico-cell which has been previously identified as a designated zone, the management system sends an alert to the advertising services. A SMS controller permits the advertising services to send a welcome text message including advertising content to the user equipment. The management system can also act as a centralized GSMA one API application gateway for location presence. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130324120 | LOCAL OPERATIONAL DATA UPLOAD - A mobile device of an apparatus in one example is configured to register with a communication network over a wireless interface through employment of a plurality of parameters for the wireless interface. The mobile device is configured to record operational data in real-time. The mobile device is configured to upload the operational data to a network element of the communication network for optimization of the communication network and/or one or more of the plurality of parameters. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130324121 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - Provided are an apparatus and method for executing machine-to-machine (M2M) communications. A device is abstracted through a pre-stored device master template and a pre-stored resource master template, M2M communications are managed through an interface to access resources, and information is periodically synchronized. A problem of system scalability and a problem of heterogeneity of interfaces to access resources may be solved and synchronization may be performed while a load of a network service capability layer (NSCL) is minimized without deteriorating service quality. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130324122 | DEEP SLEEP IN 1X M2M DEVICES - A wireless apparatus including a machine-to-machine (M2M) device. The M2M device has an applications processing element, RF transceive elements, and a deep sleep controller. The applications processing element executes one or more functions corresponding to an M2M processing environment, and directs the transmission and reception of radio frequency (RF) messages. The RF transceive elements are operationally coupled to the applications processing elements and transmit and receive the RF messages over the one or more wireless communications links. The deep sleep controller is coupled to the applications processing element and the RF transceive elements, and directs the applications processing element to request a sleep time from a corresponding base station, and causes the M2M device to enter a deep sleep mode upon acceptance of the sleep time by the corresponding base station, where the deep sleep mode is entered by removing power from the RF transceive elements. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130324123 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system for supporting machine type communication within a cellular communication network is described in which a communication device is allocated a permanent offline area in which the communication device is expected to be located whilst not attached for communication within the network. The communication device identifies a cell in which the communication device is currently located and determines whether or not the cell forms part of the permanent offline area or a temporary offline area that comprises a previously visited cell that is not part of the permanent offline area. If these areas do not comprise the cell in which the communication device is currently located, the communication device attaches to the network and communicates information identifying the cell in which the communication device is currently located to the network. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130331101 | Automatically Modifying Wireless Network Connection Policies Based on User Activity Levels - Modifying network connection policies of a wireless device based on user activity levels. One or more activity indicators of the wireless device may be monitored. One or more criteria for wireless network blacklisting may be selected based on the one or more activity indicators. The criteria may include different types of connectivity problems. A wireless network may be detected. The wireless network may be monitored for connectivity problems. The wireless network may be blacklisted if connectivity problems meeting the selected criteria for wireless network blacklisting are determined to have occurred. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130331102 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION NOTIFICATION FOR OVER-THE-AIR ACTIVATION - A method and system automatically activates a mobile station in a wireless communications network. The system includes an over the air activation function (OTAF) processor in the network that initiates an activation process in response to receiving a registration message from a mobile switching center serving the mobile station requesting the activation. Each mobile station has a unit of information stored into it at the time of its manufacture to enable it to request over the air activation. That unit of information is either the network routing address of the OTAF processor, or alternately, it is a value that is translatable into that address, either an OTAF ID number that is the same value for every mobile station or it is a sequentially serialized dummy value for the mobile identification number (a dummy MIN). | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130337807 | BASESTATION FOR CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A basestation for a cellular communications system includes back-to-back software stacks for terminating messages from a mobile station intended for the core network, and for recreating the messages in a form suitable for transmission to the core network, and further for terminating messages from the core network intended for a mobile station, and for recreating the messages in a form suitable for transmission to the mobile station. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130344866 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING AND OBTAINING USER EQUIPMENT CONTEXT AND USER EQUIPMENT IDENTITY - A method and device for accessing and obtaining user equipment (UE) context and UE identity are provided. The method for access includes: when a UE accesses a System Architecture Evolution (SAE) network, judging, by a network node, whether a Globally Unique Mobility Management Entity Identifier (GUMMEI) carried by the UE or a Mobility Management Entity Group Identity (MMEGI) n the GUMMEI is allocated or mapped by the SAE network; if the GUMMEI or MMEGI is allocated by the SAE network, selecting, by the network node, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) according to the GUMMEIA network device includes an identity attribute obtaining module and a network resource node allocation module. Therefore, the access of the UE is achieved. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130344867 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY DELIVERING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES TO MULTI-TECHNOLOGY CAPABLE WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS - A multiple wireless access technology capable (WAT-capable) wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) includes a registration message generator configured to generate a registration message indicating that the WTRU is configured to communicate using an IEEE 802.11x technology. The WTRU also includes a transmitter configured to send the registration message via an IEEE 802.11x WLAN to a cellular network during registration with the cellular network, and a receiver configured to receive services from the cellular network via the WLAN. The registration message further indicates that the WTRU is configured to receive Short Message Service (SMS) messages from the cellular network via the WLAN. The WTRU receiver receives services that include Short Message Service (SMS) messages. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20140004858 | METHOD FOR PAGING IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140018074 | NOTIFYING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ABOUT PREVIOUSLY REGISTERED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments disclosed herein provide systems and methods that notify a current wireless communication network about a previous wireless communication network. In a particular embodiment, a wireless device wirelessly registers with a first wireless communication system to obtain first registration data. The wireless device stores the first registration data and wirelessly communicates over the first wireless communication system. The communications are then terminated with the first wireless communication system. After terminating the wireless communications with the first wireless communication system, the wireless device wirelessly registers with a second wireless communication system to obtain second registration data and stores the second registration data. The wireless device transfers the first registration data to the second wireless communication system and receives user information from the second wireless communication system. The second wireless communication system used the first registration data to retrieve the user information from the first wireless communication system. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140024370 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - Method and apparatus for establishing a connection between a device (e.g., a mobile device such as a telephone or tablet) and a communication network (e.g., a telephone/data service provider's network). The communication network may adhere to a mobile communication standard such as 3GPP (3 | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140024371 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SIGNALING - The present invention relates to a mobile radio communications network device operative to transmit a non-access stratum (NAS) signal to a mobile radio communications device after a failed attempt by said mobile radio communications device to access a mobile radio communications network via said network device, said network device being arranged to include within said NAS signal information indicating to said mobile radio communications device which one of: (i) an existing NAS signalling connection; or (ii) a new NAS signalling connection, said radio mobile communications device should employ to attempt re-establishment of connection with said network device. The present invention also relates to a NAS signal to be employed by such a network device, a mobile radio communications device for exchanging signalling with the network device and related methods of such devices. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140038600 | PROVIDING MOBILE NETWORK DERIVED CHECK-IN FOR CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP - A micro-cell base station subsystem at a premises of an enterprise includes a base transceiver system configured for wireless communication with a mobile station over a frequency band allocated for mobile traffic in a macro cellular network. A communication interface is configured to send and receive communications for one or more mobile stations when at the premises via a packet data network. A controller coupled to the base transceiver system is configured to operate the micro-cell base station subsystem to appear as a base station similar to a base station of the macro cellular network, including enabling mobile station registration. A softswitch coupled to the packet data network enables mobile station registration with the macro cellular network through the micro-cell base station subsystem. A customer management server responds to identification of a registered mobile station by communicating information about a customer associated with the identified mobile station to a system used by enterprise personnel. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140038601 | SWITCHING ACTIVE SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY OF A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method is disclosed of switching the active subscriber identity of a communication terminal which is capable at each moment in time of having only one active subscriber identity. An active subscriber identity switch from a first subscriber identity to a second subscriber identity is initiated. At least one parameter associated with a time of expiry of a timer associated with the first subscriber identity is stored. The first subscriber identity is deactivated and the second subscriber identity is activated. If an active subscriber identity switch from the second subscriber identity to the first subscriber identity is initiated and the first subscriber identity is activated, it may be determined whether the time of expiry of the timer associated with the first subscriber identity has passed. Network registration of the first subscriber identity may be performed only if the time of expiry of the timer associated with the first subscriber identity has passed. Corresponding computer program product, controller, arrangement and communication terminal are also disclosed. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140038602 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER - A method and an apparatus for identifying a UE in an SAE network, and an MME are provided herein. The method includes: receiving an SAE-TMSI which is allocated to a UE that accesses an SAE network and includes at least: a pool-ID, an MME-ID, and a UE temporary identifier; using the SAE-TMSI to temporarily identify the UE in the SAE network. The apparatus includes: a receiving unit and a temporary identifying unit. The MME includes a temporary identifier allocating unit. Moreover, a method for transmitting and allocating a temporary identifier, and a method for receiving and transmitting information according to the temporary identifier are disclosed herein. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140038603 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER - A method and an apparatus for identifying a UE in an SAE network, and an MME are provided herein. The method includes: receiving an SAE-TMSI which is allocated to a UE that accesses an SAE network and includes at least: a pool-ID, an MME-ID, and a UE temporary identifier; using the SAE-TMSI to temporarily identify the UE in the SAE network. The apparatus includes: a receiving unit and a temporary identifying unit. The MME includes a temporary identifier allocating unit. Moreover, a method for transmitting and allocating a temporary identifier, and a method for receiving and transmitting information according to the temporary identifier are disclosed herein. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140038604 | COMBINED BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND BASE STATION CONTROLLER OPTIMIZED ASSIGNMENT OF FRAME OFFSETS - A system, method, and computer readable medium for managing an availability of a call agent, comprising acquiring a session identification by a basestation (BS) and a call agent (CA), wherein the BS is coupled to the CA, if the CA's state is changed from an active state to a standby state, requesting a new connection with the BS; and after the new connection is established between the CA and the BS, sending another session identification from the CA to the BS. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140045496 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access point allows access from at least one user device, which may be a wireless device or a wired local area network device. The access point has radio frequency transceiver circuitry for communicating over a wireless link with a base station selected from a plurality of available base stations, and an antenna, having an adjustable preferred direction for transmission and reception of radio frequency signals. Control circuitry selects a preferred direction for the antenna such that the access point can establish a wireless link with one of said base stations, based on a data rate that is available over the wireless link. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140045497 | RADIO BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station includes: a category acquisition unit configured to acquire one or more mobile station categories indicating capability of a mobile station with which to communicate; a category determination unit configured to determine a mobile station category to be applied to radio communications with the mobile station from the mobile station categories acquired by the category acquisition unit to correspond to one of parameters to be used in rate matching processing of the mobile station; and a category notification unit configured to notify the mobile station of the mobile station category determined by the category determination unit. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140051439 | TECHNIQUES FOR RADIO FINGERPRINTING - Examples are disclosed for radio fingerprinting. In some examples radio fingerprinting logic may be operative for execution on a processor component to receive a set of radio frequency signals from multiple mobile computing devices at a first time, store identification information for the set of radio frequency signals, receive a subset of the set of radio frequency signals from one of the multiple mobile computing devices at a second time, associate identification information for the subset of radio frequency signals to the one mobile computing device, and generate a multi-point radio fingerprint for the one mobile computing device based on the subset of radio frequency signals. Other examples are described and claimed. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140051440 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD - A base station provided with an interference judging unit judging if an amount of interference which occurs between the base station and a peripheral cell in wireless resources, allocated to a mobile station, is in an allowable range, a registering unit receiving a reception operation for registering a mobile station in a storage device which the base station can access, and a resource control unit allocating wireless resources to only mobile stations which are registered at the registering unit and changing the wireless resources to be allocated to the registered mobile station, when the amount of the interference is not in the allowable range. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140057630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER EQUIPMENT INTERACTION WITH A NETWORK USING INTERACTION INFORMATION - A method for receiving information on Tracking Areas (TAs) by a User Equipment (UE) in a communication network is provided. The method includes transmitting to a Mobility Management Entity (MME), an ATTACH REQUEST message in a deregistered state; and receiving, from the MME, an ATTACH ACCEPT message including at least two different types of Tracking Area Identify (TAI) lists that identify TAs. The at least two different types of TAI lists are concatenated in the ATTACH ACCEPT message and each of the at least two different types of TAI lists is variable within a maximum size. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140066062 | SMART HOME NETWORK SYSTEM AND REGISTER CONTROLLER AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING HOME DEVICES - A smart home network system includes a number of home devices, a smart gateway, and at least one register controller. The register controller generates and sends a registration request to the smart gateway. After receive the registration request, the smart gateway assigns a register region and a region code in a mapping list stored in the smart gateway. The register controller further generates and sends a registration code to the home devices in the area where the register controller is placed, in order to control the home devices to register their configuration information in the mapping list stored in the smart gateway. Therefore, the smart gateway is able to control each individual home device. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140066063 | HEARTBEAT PERIOD DETERMINATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PUSH SERVICE IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A heartbeat period determination method and apparatus of a push service in a wireless network is provided. The heartbeat period determination method for a push service in a terminal of a wireless network includes transmitting a registration request message including terminal information and network information to a registration server, receiving a registration reply message including ping interval information from the registration server, establishing a push channel with the push server, and determining the heartbeat period using the received ping interval information. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140066064 | USING A LOCATION TO REFINE NETWORK-PROVIDED TIME ZONE INFORMATION - A method for using a location to refine network-provided time zone information is disclosed. The method can include a wireless communication device receiving a time zone information message from a network; determining multiple candidate time zones matching a set of time zone identification parameters included in the received time zone information message; deriving a location of the wireless communication device; and using the location to select a current time zone for the wireless communication device from the candidate time zones matching the set of time zone identification parameters. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140073322 | REAL-TIME LOAD ANALYSIS FOR MODIFICATION OF NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - Adjusting RAN performance by adapting cell coverage area can help optimize a wireless communications network. RAN topology can be adapted based on analysis of real-time load conditions of RAN base stations. Analysis of the load conditions of RAN base stations can be performed in a core-network of a wireless carrier rather than distributing the analysis to RAN-side elements. Analysis can be based on receiving real-time load information relating to key performance indicators such as X2 load, S1 load, instant outbound handover count, instant inbound handover count, etc. Further, analysis can include the application of predetermined rules relating to preferential performance of the base stations. This can facilitate ranking neighboring base stations, adding new base stations, deleting base stations, black/white listing base stations, etc., in neighbor relations data structures, such as automatic neighbor relations structures for self-organizing networks, e.g., eNodeBs in LTE networks. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140073323 | SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD BASED ON MULTIPLE NETWORKS, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed is a relay for a simultaneous data transmission using multiple networks including: a connection control unit configured to control a terminal equipment to connect to multiple networks, when sensing entrance of the terminal equipment currently connected with a macro base station of the mobile communication network into simultaneous transmission service coverage serviced by the multiple networks, at least one of the multiple networks including at least one micro base station; and a relay processing unit configured to partition data transmitted or received to/from the terminal equipment into partial data corresponding to each of the multiple networks, and transmit and/or receive the partitioned partial data through each of the multiple networks. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140087728 | CONNECTING DEVICES TO A POLICY CHARGING RULES FUNCTION DEVICE - A first network device is configured to receive a first message from a user device, the first message including an identifier for the user device and a type of information being requested by the user device, and determine a level of quality of service to be applied by a network, based on the type of information being requested by the user device. The first network is further configured to receive a second message from a second network device, the second message including an identifier for a third network device. The first network device is further configured to determine the policy device connected to the third network device. The first network device is further configured to connect with the policy device, and send rules and policies associated with the level of quality of service to the policy device. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140094170 | SYSTEM FOR ALLOWING REGISTRATION OF DECT DEVICES - A system may be provided and may include a trusted DECT device; and a DECT base station; wherein the trusted DECT device is arranged to send, to the DECT base station, registration allowable DECT device credentials; wherein the DECT base station is arranged to: receive from a requesting DECT device a request for registration of the requesting DECT device to the DECT base station; wherein the request comprises requesting DECT device credentials; register the requesting DECT device to the DECT base station if the requesting DECT device credentials match the registration allowable DECT device credentials; and prevent a registration of the requesting DECT device to the DECT base station if the requesting DECT device credentials differ from the registration allowable DECT device credentials. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140094171 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, TRACKING ERROR MANAGEMENT DEVICE, AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A paging signal is transmitted to plural base stations which are prioritized with the use of communication results between a wireless communication terminal and the base stations to provide means for suppressing a control signal traffic, and a bandwidth used for a control signal can be effectively used. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140094172 | PERFORMANCE MONITORING-BASED NETWORK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT WITH MOBILITY SUPPORT - A device receives, from a mobile device, a registration request when the mobile device moves to a new service area of a network, where the registration request includes a resource management (RM) extension and a performance monitoring (PM) extension. The device also inspects quality of service requirements of the registration request, identifies performance aspects of the registration request to be verified, and inspects performance monitoring information associated with the registration request to identify a performance monitoring test needed to make a resource management decision. The device further executes the performance monitoring test, collects results of the execution of the performance monitoring test, analyzes the collected results of the performance monitoring test, determines whether intervention related to network topology and configuration is possible, and accepts or rejects the registration request based on the analysis of the collected results of the performance monitoring test. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140099951 | Handling of Operator Connection Offers in a Communication Network - Method and apparatus of supporting selection of operator connection offers for a Machine to Machine equipment ( | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140106746 | Network Attach Method for Relay Node and Related Apparatus - A method is disclosed for a relay node (RN) attaching a network. The RN accesses a first cell. The RN obtains a list of cells that support a relay function and allow being accessed by the RN. When the first cell accessed by the RN is one of the cells in the list and a relay function of a mobility management device serving the RN is supported, not leaving, by the RN, the first cell. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140113625 | METHOD AND TEST EQUIPMENT FOR AUTOMATICALLY INITIALIZING A MOBILE STATION DURING A TEST - A method automatically initializes a mobile station during a test between a mobile station and a test equipment emulating a single cell of a cellular mobile communication system, wherein the mobile station is initially registered to the cell having a first location area code. First, radio transmission into the cell is terminated by the test equipment. Then, radio transmission is restarted into the cell, but now having a second location area code, wherein the second location area code is different to the first location area code, forcing the mobile station to perform a registration procedure to the cell. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140113626 | METHOD FOR OPERATING IN IDLE MODE AND M2M APPARATUS - A method for operating in an idle mode and a machine-to-machine (M2M) apparatus are provided. The M2M apparatus receives a deregistration-response (DREG-RSP) message from a base station, and the M2M apparatus in the idle mode monitors a paging advertisement (PAG-ADV) message from the base station. Comprised is a fixed M2M deregistration identifier (FMDID), and the FMDID is a 16-bit identifier for identifying the M2M apparatus in a region of the base station. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140113627 | RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM AND PORTABLE TERMINAL DEVICE - As a result of ISR being enabled between a portable terminal device and a network which are capable of communicating by using the communication protocols of a plurality of wireless access technologies, the portable terminal device performs position registration processing between the plurality of wireless access technologies and the portable terminal device each time a fixed period of time elapses, and the portable terminal device is able to move between the plurality of wireless access technologies that have already been registered, without conducting new position registration processing. At this time, if there is a possibility of there being a difference in ISR states (activated or not activated) between the portable terminal device and the network, the portable terminal device ignores any instructions issued by the network for ISR to be enabled in the portable terminal device. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140120910 | KIOSK-BASED MOBILE CUSTOMER CHECK-IN - A customer-accessible station includes a near field communication (NFC) transceiver configured to interact with another NFC transceiver of a customer's mobile station and/or a micro-cell base station subsystem for use at a premises of an enterprise includes a base transceiver system configured for wireless communication with a mobile station over a frequency band allocated for mobile traffic in a macro cellular network. A communication interface sends and receives communications for one or more mobile stations when at the premises via a packet data network. A controller coupled to the base transceiver system operates the micro-cell base station subsystem to appear as a base station similar to a base station of the macro cellular network, including enabling mobile station registration. A customer management server responds to identification of a registered mobile station by communicating information about a customer associated with the identified mobile station to a system used by enterprise personnel. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140120911 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, GATEWAY DEVICE, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING GATEWAY DEVICE - At the time of registration of a base station, the base station reports to a gateway device list information regarding core networks that are to be connected. At the time of call origination from a user terminal, the base station reports to the gateway device, by means of a message of protocol for termination between a base station and a gateway, network identification information that indicates core networks that are to be connected to the user terminal The gateway device transfers a control message from the user terminal to the core networks indicated by the network identification information that was reported. At the time of call connection to the user terminal, the gateway device selects the base station to which paging from the core network is to be transmitted on the basis of the list information reported from the base station at the time of registration. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140120912 | GLOBAL PLATFORM FOR MANAGING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES - A method of operating a mobile wireless network comprising: receiving, by a provisioning server, a signal from a mobile wireless network specifying a location of a first mobile device having a first International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) and operating in the mobile wireless network under a first condition, the mobile wireless network including a plurality of mobile switching centers (MSCs) and a plurality of mobile devices operating in the mobile wireless network; provisioning the first IMSI in the first HLR based on a state transition rule from a first provisioning state to a second provisioning state; provisioning a second IMSI in the first HLR based on the state transition rule from a third provisioning state to the first provisioning state; and transmitting data identifying the second IMSI to the first mobile device to allow the first mobile device to operate in the mobile wireless network under a second condition. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140120913 | Tracking Registration Buffer in a Cellular Network - Embodiments described herein may help to provide a delayed zone-update process. An exemplary method may involve a user entity, which is initially operating in a first of a plurality of multi-coverage-area zones in a radio access network (RAN), subsequently determining that the user entity has moved into a second multi-coverage-area zone of the RAN, wherein the user entity is located in a first coverage area of the second multi-coverage-area zone. In response, the user entity may refrain from sending a registration message to register in the second multi-coverage-area zone until the earlier of: (i) a threshold period of time elapsing and (ii) the user entity moving into another coverage area in the second multi-coverage-area zone that is different from the first coverage area. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140128062 | POWER CONSUMPTION IMPROVEMENT FOR CERTAIN M2M DEVICES - Performance is improved in certain M2M devices by suppressing explicit network registration or attachment. The described techniques may be used, for example, by M2M devices that periodically or occasionally transmit event data using wireless communication networks without needing to receive periodic or on-demand communications from the network for regular operation. In some embodiments, an M2M device may continue to monitor pilot channels of available wireless networks, select a particular network for communication from among the available wireless networks, and monitor system information for the selected network without registering on the selected network. The M2M device may suppress explicit registration based on one or more explicit registration triggers associated with the selected network. The M2M device may be implicitly registered as part of the network access transmitting the captured or measured event data to the selected network. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128063 | Extending Use of a Cellular Communication Capabilities in a Wireless Device to Another Device - Extending cellular telecommunication service from a first UE to another device. The first UE may register for cellular telecommunication service with a cellular network using a first cellular service account, using a cellular communication link via a cellular radio. A second device may be discovered and a communication link may be established between the first UE and the second device. The second device may be registered to use cellular telecommunication capability provided by the first UE. Communications between the second device and the cellular network may be conveyed via the communication link between the first UE and the second device and the cellular communication link. Conveying communications between the second device and the cellular network may provide use of the first cellular service account for cellular telecommunication service to the second device. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128064 | Managing Network Load Using Device Application Programs - Concepts and technologies are described herein for managing network load using device application programs. An illustrative method includes receiving, at a mobile device, a list of preferred combinations of location area codes (“LACs”), cell identifiers (“CIDs”), and times that data access by the mobile device is to be incentivized, determining a current LAC associated with a location area within which the mobile device is currently located, determining a current CID associated with a base transceiver station to which the mobile device is currently connected, determining a current time, and determining if the current LAC, the current cell ID, and the current time are included as a preferred combination in the list. The method also includes providing an indication that data access by the mobile device is incentivized if the current LAC, the current cell ID, and the current time are included in the list as a preferred combination. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128065 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CALL RECEPTION - A base station registers a mobile station subjected to the call reception control of the base station. When connection between the mobile station registered by the base station and a higher-level device of the base station is terminated after detecting that the mobile station is located in a communication area of the base station, the base station causes the higher-level device to maintain information indicating that the mobile station is located in the communication area, without notifying the higher-level device of termination of the connection. When a call addressed to the mobile station is detected after termination of the connection between the mobile station and the higher-level device, the base station gives a notification about detection of the call. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128066 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED ASSOCIATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating in a wireless network are provided. In some aspects, an access point may comprise a receiver configured to receive an access request message from a wireless station, the message comprising an indication of a plurality of network connection available to the wireless station including a link to a second access point. The receiver may be further configured to receive connectivity information associated with the link, based on the indication, from the second access point. The access point may further comprise a processor configured to determine whether to grant access to the wireless station based, at least in part, on the indication and the connectivity information, and a transmitter configured to transmit a response to the wireless station based on the determining. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128067 | NETWORK-ASSISTED DISCOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network-assisted discovery method and apparatus for facilitating Device to Device (D2D) communication in the wireless communication system is provided. The network-assisted discovery method of a terminal in a wireless communication system, the method comprising, broadcasting a discovery signal information in a discovery signal transmission duration of the terminal, receiving assisted discovery information from a base station, determining whether the assisted discovery information comprises the discovery information of the terminal and determining whether to transmit a discovery transmission request message to the base station based on the result of the determination. The network-assisted discovery method and apparatus of the present disclosure is capable of mitigating the problems caused by resource collision and reducing power consumption of the device in the D2D wireless communication system. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128068 | MOBILITY CONCEPT - A concept for a mobile relay station transceiver ( | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140128069 | Method, User Equipment, and Base Station for Changing Access Cell - The present invention discloses a method, a user equipment, and a base station for changing an access cell. According to the method, the user equipment, and the base station in the embodiments of the present invention, when the UE leaves the coverage of the first radio network and the UE is in the dual-camped state, the first cell of the first radio network that the UE currently accesses is changed to the second cell of the second radio network that the UE currently accesses, so as to avoid a cell change failure caused by an incorrect target cell during cell reselection or handover, thereby accurately changing an access cell, reducing network delay, and improving user experience. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140135002 | DYNAMIC TERMINAL IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT - A user device may receive an identifier without prior provisioning from a server. The server may be configured to: receive, from a user device a first identifier, a first value of a second identifier, and an instruction to register the first value with the first identifier; register the first value with the first identifier based on determining that the second identifier is available for registration; receive request for subscription to receive a notification when a second user device registers with the first identifier; provide, to the user device, a list of unavailable or available second values of the second identifiers; receive, from the user device, a second instruction to register one of the available second values with the first identifier and with the user device; and receive, from the user device, a third instruction including an instruction to unregister the first value with the first identifier. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140135003 | METHOD FOR ATTACHING A USER TERMINAL TO A BASE STATION OF A NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for attaching a user terminal to a base station of a network, said network comprising a plurality of base stations, said method comprising: —defining a global cost function which is a weighted sum of the user terminal transmission delays, over all the user terminals in the network, using a user terminal's context weighting factor representing a user terminal's characteristic; —defining a local cost function for each user terminal from said global cost function, said local cost function taking into account said user terminal's context weighting factor for each user terminal, and being a function of the base station to which this user terminal is associated; —running a Gibbs sampler with said local cost function for producing user-base station association probabilities; —choosing the user-base station association probability which favors low local cost; and—attaching said user terminal to a base station according to the user-base station association probability chosen. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140135004 | MULTI-STAGE TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL SCHEME FOR ACCESS POINT - Transmit power for an access point is controlled based on information received by the access point. For example, an access point may employ one or more algorithms that use messages received from nearby access terminals to maintain an acceptable tradeoff between providing an adequate coverage area for access point transmissions and mitigating interference that these transmissions cause at nearby access terminals. Here, the access point may employ a network listen-based algorithm upon initialization of the access terminal to provide preliminary transmit power control until sufficient information is collected for another transmit power control algorithm (e.g., an access terminal assisted algorithm). Also, the access terminal may employ an active access terminal protection scheme to mitigate interference the access point may otherwise cause to a nearby access terminal that is in active communication with another access point. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140135005 | Method of Handling Location Service and Related Communication Device - A method of handling location service for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises transmitting a message including positioning support information of the network via a first RAT to a mobile device in the wireless communication system, for informing the mobile device whether positioning is supported in the first RAT, wherein the positioning support information indicates whether positioning is supported in the first RAT. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140148157 | NOMINATION OF A PRIMARY CELL PHONE FROM A POOL OF CELL PHONES - A system and method of nominating a mobile device are described. A user account is stored on a database. The user account is assigned a mobile phone line. In some embodiments, a first mobile device and a second mobile device are registered with the user account. The mobile phone line is active for the first mobile device and inactive for the second mobile device. A request to update the user account to make the mobile phone line inactive for the first mobile device and active for the second mobile device is received. The user account is updated to make the mobile phone line inactive for the first mobile device and active for the second mobile device. In some embodiments, the first mobile device and the second mobile device are cell phones. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140148158 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DEVICE TRIGGERING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for controlling device triggering in a mobile communication system includes registering a default urgent level of a terminal when the terminal is connected, receiving a device trigger register including urgent level information transmitted from an application server, and setting the received urgent level in a packet filter, and comparing, upon reception of a downlink data packet from the application server, a default urgent level and an urgent level of the application server to determine whether to transmit a downlink data notification. The method further includes receiving a device trigger register including wait time information transmitted from an application server, and then setting the received wait time in the packet filter, and buffering during the wait time upon reception of the downlink data packet from the application server, and then determining a downlink data notification transmission upon expiration of the wait time. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140148159 | LOW DUTY CYCLE DEVICE PROTOCOL - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for establishing communication between a low duty cycle device and other devices through a wireless communication network. In one particular implementation, the low duty cycle device may awaken from a hibernating state in synchronization with transmission of messages. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140148160 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, SWITCHING STATION, AND LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD FOR MOBILE STATION - A decrease is realized in network load caused by a change in selection of location registration device or an increase or decrease in the number of installations, on a circuit switching network side. A mobile communication system includes a mobile station, a packet switching station, and a plurality of location registration devices that perform location management of the mobile station. With respect to the mobile station, after one location registration device is already selected from among the plurality of location registration devices, when the mobile station performs location registration, an NRI (Network Resource Identifier) included in a TMSI (Temporary Mobile Station Identifier) is transmitted to the packet switching station. The packet switching station makes a request for location registration with respect to the one location registration device, based on the NRI. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140162639 | Cellular Device Identifier Provisioning Verification - Systems and methods are described for confirming the accuracy and consistency of cellular device provisioning parameters such as telematics station identifiers (TSTIDs) stored at multiple locations. One implementation consists of a method for ensuring accuracy and consistency of parameters stored at multiple locations. The method involves storing parameters on a computer readable medium, connecting to a mobile station corresponding to a first stored parameter, and requesting the mobile station with which a connection has been established report parameters stored at the mobile station. The method further involves establishing an API call with a carrier network operator who provides services to the mobile station, transmitting a second stored parameter to the carrier network operator and requesting the carrier network operator report parameters corresponding to the second stored parameter. The method then compares the parameters received from the mobile station with the parameters received from the carrier network operator. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140162640 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUBSCRIPTION DATA OPTIMIZATION - Devices and methods are provided for subscription data optimization in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method may involve receiving an update location request from a mobile entity and forwarding the update location request to a subscriber data repository. The method may involve receiving a profile identifier from the subscriber data repository, the profile identifier corresponding to profile parameters for a subscription service for the mobile entity. The method may also involve accessing a lookup table to determine the profile parameters associated with the profile identifier, and determining whether to authorize the subscription service based at least in part on the profile parameters. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140162641 | SYSTEM, A FEMTOCELL HAVING THE SAME, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING USER EQUIPMENT TO CONNECT TO WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for allowing and managing user equipment to connect to wireless local network from cellular network via a femtocell is provided. The method includes the steps of: broadcasting an RF signal within a predetermined area to allow the user equipment within the predetermined area to register with the femtocell; broadcasting a paging signal to search for at least one hotspot within a wireless cellular network coverage area when the user equipment has registered with the femtocell; establishing a connection between the femtocell and a found hotspot; sending a request to the found hotspot for obtaining connection information; sending the connection information to the user equipment registered with the femtocell, allowing the user equipment to access the wireless local area network via the found hotspot. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140162642 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING USER EQUIPMENT CAPABILITY INFORMATION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of transmitting user equipment (UE) capability information in a multiple component carrier system by the UE is provided. The method includes receiving, from a base station (BS), a UE capability request message, and transmitting, to the BS, a UE capability response message including a supportedbandcombination field indicating one or more band combinations supported by the UE. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140162643 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE MULTICAST COMMUNICATION IN CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS - Disclosed is a method and an apparatus for device-to-device (D2D) multicast communication in a cellular mobile communication system. The method for D2D communication may include transmitting a server designation request message requesting registration as a server terminal to a base station, and transmitting service information using a D2D multicast or broadcast communication scheme based on a radio resource allocated by the base station. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140162644 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROXIMITY SERVICE ENHANCEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to provide proximity service discovery in a wireless communication system. The method includes transmitting, from a first user equipment (UE), a message indicating a presence of the first UE to a serving cell or evolved Node B (eNB) when the first UE wants to be discovered. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140171075 | Method for Preventing Storage of Prohibited Data on an Ad Hoc Moving Data Network - The present disclosure provides a method operable in a balloon network. The method can include determining that a balloon is at a location associated with a first legally-defined geographic area, wherein an area profile identifies a list of geographically-prohibited data that is restricted from being cached in the first legally-defined geographic area. The method can also include receiving first data. The method can also include using the list of geographically-prohibited data to determine whether or not the first data is geographically-prohibited data. If the first data is geographically-prohibited data, then the method can further include refraining from storing the first data in data storage at the first balloon. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140171076 | DE-REGISTRATION METHOD, HOME NODEB (HNB), AND HOME NODEB GATEWAY (HNB GW) - The present invention relates to the field of communication technology, and a de-registration method, a Home NodeB (HNB) and a Home NodeB Gateway (HNB GW) are disclosed. In an embodiment, the present invention provides a de-registration method, comprising: initiating, by an HNB GW, release of pre-registration resources corresponding to user equipment (UE) after the HNB GW receives indication information indicating that the UE moves to another cell from a source HNB. Applying the embodiment of the present invention can release pre-registration resources in time and reduce waste of resources. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140171077 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD OF INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - Provided is an information processing apparatus including a determination unit which determines whether a first wireless communication apparatus for which a connection right to connect to a predetermined network using wireless communication has not been set satisfies a predetermined condition for connecting to the network and performing predetermined communication processing. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first wireless communication apparatus performs the communication processing using the connection right set for the first wireless communication apparatus through transfer of the connection right from a second wireless communication apparatus for which the connection right has been set to the first wireless communication apparatus. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140179313 | INTEGRATING MOBILE DEVICES INTO A FIXED COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURE - Systems, methods, and computer program products for use with a wireless communication network. A fixed communication network includes a device server and a fixed information technology (IT) device coupled with the device server. A mobile communication device is coupled by the wireless communication network with the device server and with the IT device. The device server is configured to store identification information for the IT device. The mobile communication device is configured to determine a current location of the mobile communication device, to request the identification information for the IT device from the device server over the wireless communication network, to receive the identification information for the IT device over the wireless communication network from the device server, and to transmit a service request, based upon the identification information, over the wireless communication network to the IT device. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140179314 | PROVISIONING AND USING WILDCARDED PRIVATE IDENTITY TO REGISTER DEVICES FOR WIRELESS SERVICES - Systems and techniques are provided for registering similar subscriber devices in a communication network. A unique Private Identity (PRID) is generated for several user devices associated together under one user account for service through the communication network. The PRID includes a group indicator identifying the PRID's association with a group of devices subject to a common service profile, a Public Identity (PUID) string of characters that uniquely identifies the one user account, and a device identifier uniquely assigned to identify the respective device within the group under the one user account. One common PRID is generated for identifying the common service profile with respect to all of the devices of the group under the one user account. The common PRID includes the group indicator, the PUID, and a wildcard in a field of the predetermined format for a device identifier. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140179315 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MOBILITY OF TERMINAL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for managing mobility of a terminal by a first base station in a communication system. The first base station assigns a first address to the terminal located in a cell managed by the first base station and establishes a session to an external server that communicates with the terminal using the first address. If the terminal moves to a cell managed by a second base station different from the first base station, the first base station determines whether information about a second address assigned to the terminal by the second base station is received within a predetermined time. Upon receiving the information about the second address within the predetermined time, the first base station transmits data received from the external server to the terminal through the second base station using the information about the second address. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140179316 | USER GROUPING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications and provide a user grouping method and apparatus, so as to group served users. The method, includes: determining group number information of a user group to which a UE belongs according to a received user information parameter of the user equipment UE and preconfigured mapping information, where the mapping information is a mapping relationship between the user information parameter and the group number information of the user group, and is preconfigured according to an operating policy of an operator, and the user information parameter is an information parameter used for identifying a feature of the UE; and identifying the user group to which the UE belongs by using group information, where the group information includes: the group number information. The embodiments of the present invention are applicable to a user grouping scenario. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140194118 | SEAMLESS TRANSITION OF DATA SERVICES IN A SINGLE-SIM MULTI-ACTIVE CELLULAR DEVICE - Systems, apparatuses and methods are described for seamless transition of data services in a single-SIM multi-active (SSMA) cellular device operating in a mixed technology cellular network. An SSMA device provides multiple virtual terminals capable of simultaneously maintaining multiple active services on different technology networks. The virtual terminals maintain service continuity by coordinating to seamlessly migrate data services from one network technology to another as a user geographically navigates a mixed technology network. This technology may be implemented in user equipment without modifying the various networks in the mixed technology network. This technology improves user experience and customer satisfaction with network providers. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140199999 | Discovery - Methods, apparatuses and a computer program product for small cell and user equipment discovery. The present invention includes obtaining information regarding small cell discovery on macro layer, obtaining information regarding user equipment discovery, determining whether the information regarding user equipment discovery depends on the information regarding small cell discovery, if it is determined that the information regarding user equipment discovery depends on the information regarding small cell discovery, building parameters for user equipment discovery based on parameters for small cell discovery included in the information regarding small cell discovery, and starting small cell discovery and user equipment discovery based on the parameters. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140206352 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system capable of performing communication between a user equipment device connected to a relay device and a core network if the relay device moves. An RN sets a TA of an eNB to be connected with the own device as a TA of the own device. For example, when the RN moves along an arrow, the TA of the RN is changed from a first TA to which a fourth eNB belongs to a third TA to which a tenth eNB belongs. Upon change of the TA of the RN as described above, a user equipment device transmits a TA update request signal of the own device to a target second MME. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140213251 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A wireless communication controlling device for controlling a communication between a wireless terminal and a server via a base station, the wireless communication controlling device including: a receiver configured to receive a request of a service for the server, time data of the service, location data of the wireless terminal, quality data of the wireless communication channel, and service data of the service, and a processor configured to estimate a communication speed for the service in accordance with the time data and the location data, to determine a quality threshold and a speed threshold respectively, in accordance with the location data and the service data, and to determine whether to grant the request of the service for the server or not, in accordance with a comparison between the quality data and the quality threshold and a comparison between the estimated communication speed and the speed threshold. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140213252 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD IN M2M DEVICE GROUP - The present disclosure relates to a method for M2M devices in an idle mode to perform a network reentry procedure in a wireless access network supporting machine-to-machine communication (M2M), and the method may include receiving information related to selection of a group delegate (GD) from a base station; receiving a response to a ranging request from the base station, wherein the ranging request is transmitted by an M2M device which is selected as the GD among a plurality of M2M devices in an M2M device group based on the information related to selection of the GD; and performing a network reentry procedure on the basis of the received response. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140220971 | Change of Subscription Data In An Identification Module - Described herein is a method for changing active subscription data in an identification module for use in a mobile radio device that can be connected to a mobile radio network. After the activation of new subscription data, the identification module returns automatically to the activation of old subscription data that had already been activated before the change if at least one predefined event is not detected in the identification module after the activation of the new subscription data. Moreover, the present techniques relate to an identification module that is suitable for carrying out the method. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140235239 | SERVICE CREATION USING MOBILE DEVICE - A method may be performed by a mobile device. The method may include receiving subscriber input for a temporary service account for a user associated with a portable device and creating the temporary service account. The method may also include receiving, from the portable device via a local wireless network, a registration request to use the temporary service account and assigning, to the portable device, a temporary mobile number selected from an available pool of mobile numbers. The method may also include sending, via the local wireless network, a registration confirmation to the portable device and providing, to the portable device, mobile services using both a broadband cellular network and the local wireless network. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140235240 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING GS ASSOCIATION - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for establishing a Gs association, where the method includes: when a serving GPRS support node SGSN determines that an SGs association of a user equipment UE in an idle mode signaling reduction function ISR activated state is released, sending, by the SGSN, a location update request to a mobile switch center/visitor location register MSC/VLR, so that the SGSN and the MSC/VLR establish a Gs association for the UE. An embodiment of the present invention further provides an SGSN. In the embodiments of the present invention, when a UE is in an ISR activated state, and after an SGs association is released, a Gs association can be established in time, and therefore, the UE is not implicitly detached by an MSC/VLR, and a mobile terminated service of the UE is not affected, thereby enhancing service experience of a user. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140242986 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING NEW WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for connecting, configuring and testing new wireless devices and applications. For example, one embodiment of a computer-implemented method for enabling a trial wireless device comprises: automatically pre-provisioning one or more trial SIM cards for operation on a particular wireless cellular network on behalf of a prospective customer; automatically pre-configuring a trial wireless machine-to-machine (“M2M”) device on behalf of the prospective customer; wherein the trial M2M device includes testing and monitoring program code which, when the trial M2M device is connected to a computer system, performs the operations of: automatically connecting to the wireless cellular network execute a plurality of test operations for testing the SIM card and the trial M2M device, the test operations including determining whether the SIM card is correctly provisioned for the wireless network; determining whether the trial M2M wireless device is operating properly; and determining the existence of wireless data connectivity. | 08-28-2014 |
| 20140248875 | REMINDERS BASED ON DEVICE PRESENCE - An architecture can facilitate and/or transmit reminders based upon device presence techniques in connection with a wireless communications network. For example, when certain mobile devices register with a particular network entity (e.g., a femtocell) that services a particular target location (e.g., place of residence), then such registration can be leveraged to indicate presence at the target location. Accordingly, reminders can be configured by custodian devices and delivered to subservient devices if certain predetermined conditions or criteria are satisfied in connection with the presence information. | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140256318 | BATTERY CONSERVATION WITH IDLE MODE SIGNALING REDUCTION - Systems and methods are provided that may reduce the battery consumption footprint of a user equipment (UE) in a communications network, such as an LTE network. When a UE is in idle mode, when Idle Mode Signaling Reduction (ISR) is active in the communications network, and when the coverage area of the communications network, such as the LTE network, overlaps with the coverage area of one or more legacy radio access technology (RAT) networks, such as 2G and 3G networks, a module within the UE allows the UE to solely monitor paging messages on the legacy RAT network. Allowing the UE to camp on a legacy RAT network instead of an LTE network to monitor for paging messages can result in lower battery consumption levels when compared to the UE camping on the LTE network. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140256319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PAGING TERMINATED CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for paging a terminated call in a new Mobility Management Entity (MME) of a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a Tracking Area Update (TAU) REQUEST message from a target terminal which will receive a voice call when the target terminal moves from a currently accessed cell to a cell included in another Tracking Area Identity (TAI) list and the target terminal accesses a packet network, sending an inquiry to an old MME which manages a TAI about whether a terminated call paging for the target terminal is being performed, generating a TAU ACCEPT message including a voice call paging indicator when an answer corresponds to performance of the terminated call paging for the target terminal, and transmitting the TAU ACCEPT message to the target terminal. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140256320 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTION OF WIRELESS SERVICE PROVIDER VIA A MOBILE TERMINAL - A system and method for provisioning a wireless service provider through a mobile device using a SIM card within the mobile device accesses a server via a wireless hub using the SIM card and requests comparison data relating to a plurality of wireless service providers. The comparison data is provided to the mobile device from the server responsive to the request, and the mobile device displays this comparison information. A user selection is provided selecting a particular wireless service provider using the mobile device, and the selected wireless service provider is established as the wireless service provider for the mobile device. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140256321 | REGISTRATION SCENARIOS BETWEEN NEW AND LEGACY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method, wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), and base station for access network interworking. Temporary identity mapping rules are defined for use during access network reselection. Mapping rules for tracking area identity, routing area identity, temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), packet TMSI, and S-TMSI identity are used when reselecting UTRAN, E-UTRAN, and GERAN access networks. Depending upon access network support, a WTRU may indicate a type of identity (TMSI, P-TMSI, or S-TMSI) that is included in an access network reselection request. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140274046 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) HANDOVER - A method of wireless communication determines whether the timing of a non-serving RAT is known. When the timing is known and it is time to report on the non-serving RAT, the UE clears enough consecutive time slots to verify the identity of the base station in the non-serving RAT. During the cleared time slots the identity of the base station is verified. When the timing is unknown and it is time to report on the non-serving RAT, a UE clears enough consecutive time slots to measure the timing of the non-serving RAT and to verify the identity of a base station in the non-serving RAT. During the cleared time slots, the timing is acquired and the identity of the base station is verified. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140274047 | ROUTING PAGING MESSAGES FOR MULTIPLE SUBSCRIPTION IDENTITIES OF A SINGLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE VIA A SINGLE PAGING CHANNEL - A method is provided for conserving power on a wireless communication device having multi-subscription capabilities. Instead of scanning different paging channels for each of a plurality of subscriptions, power may be conserved by using a single paging channel from a serving access network for all paging messages from the plurality of subscriptions. The wireless communication device may provide a serving access network information for the plurality of subscriptions, where each of the plurality of subscriptions is associated with a different paging channel. The serving access network may select or obtain a single paging channel for all paging messages from different core networks associated with the plurality of subscriptions. The wireless communication device may be informed of the selected paging channel by the access network so it monitors for paging messages for all subscriptions on that selected paging channel only. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140274048 | INTEGRATING IN-VEHICLE ACCESS-POINT WITH CELLULAR OFFLOADING SYSTEM - A method and system for selectively providing cellular offload services to mobile user data devices via vehicle-based access points. Subscribers and affiliates of vehicle-related online services register their user data devices for authorized connections. Vehicle metrics are used to determine the state of a vehicle (being driven or parked), and the metrics of the user device can be compared with the vehicle metrics to determine if the user device is inside the vehicle. Limiting access to authorized user devices reduces load on the vehicular access points and allows preventing the vehicular access points from being erroneously included on access point maps and thereby infecting the maps. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140287752 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY HANDLING SMS-RELATED SIGNAL - A Mobility Management Entity (MME) having MSC functionality implemented therein, performs a scheme of MTC device triggering has been conceived. A PS and CS combined location update is sent to the HSS/HLR by means of piggybacking of CS domain information over an interface between the MME and the HSS/HLR as part of a “combined” EPS/IMSI attach procedure or a “combined” TA/LA update procedure. The, SMS signaling is received from an SMS-SC (GMSC/IWMSC) to transfer an SMS message for an LTE-only device or a single-mode E-UTRAN device. Here, the SMS signaling is received from the SMS-SC (GMSC/IWMSC) via an interworking function (IWF) that provides interworking between a MAP interface and a Diameter interface. As a result, M2M or MTC devices can be supported for an LTE network or the like. | 09-25-2014 |
| 20140295837 | METHOD FOR MANAGING TRACKING AREA IDENTITY LIST AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - The present disclosure proposes a method for managing a tracking area identity (TAI) list to be used by a user equipment (UE), a user equipment using the same, and a communication system using the same. The present disclosure would include a UE which stores a forbidden TAI list. A mobility management entity (MME) would transmit a first message which includes a TAI List to the UE. The UE would then determine whether the TAI list and the forbidden TAI list contain a first tracking area which is on both the TAI list and the forbidden tracking area list. If that is the case, the UE may either remove the first tracking area from the TAI list or the UE may remove the first track area from the forbidden tracking area list. After the revision of the TAI list is complete, the UE may synchronize the TAI with the MME. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140295838 | LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A location registration method of a terminal in a mobile communication system is provided. The method transmitting a location registration request message to a network, waiting, when a reject message is received from the network in response to the location registration request message, until a radio connection with the network releases completely, and transmitting, when the radio connection is released, a new location registration request message to the network. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140302846 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REGISTERING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES AND SCHEDULING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE TRANSMISSIONS - Methods of registering a Machine Type Communications (MTC) device for scheduling MTC device transmissions by a network element are provided. The method includes registering a MTC device. The registering includes assigning at least one resource block to the MTC device for transmitting at least one MTC device transmission. The registering includes establishing a triggering mechanism that detects when a trigger event occurs, such that when the trigger event occurs, the MTC device transmits the at least one MTC device transmission on the assigned at least one resource block. The registering includes configuring the network element to receive the at least one MTC device transmission based on the assigned resource block and the established triggering mechanism. The method includes allowing the MTC device to transmit the at least one MTC device transmission over the resource block that is assigned during the registration. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140323127 | PROCESSING DATA - Measures for processing data in a telecommunications network. At a cache, a subscriber configuration data request requesting subscriber configuration data for a subscriber device is received from a network node in a cluster of network nodes. In response to receipt of the subscriber configuration data request, it is determined that a shared cache store does not contain subscriber configuration data for the subscriber device. In response to the determination, subscriber configuration data for the subscriber device is retrieved from a subscriber configuration network node. The subscriber configuration data for the subscriber device retrieved from the subscriber configuration network node is transmitted to the network node. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140329525 | Methods And Devices For Associating Users To Base Stations In Third Generation Wireless Networks Using Fairness Considerations - The transmission of data from base stations to users (and their devices) in a wireless network is made using proportional fairness without sacrificing throughput by taking in to account fairness considerations at the time the devices are associated with a base station. | 11-06-2014 |
| 20140335859 | METHOD AND UE FOR NETWORK ATTACHMENT - A method and a user equipment (UE) for network attachment are disclosed. The method includes receiving first status information associated with one or more remote radio units (RRUs) for supporting the small cell from the one or more RRUs, receiving second status information associated with one or more macro cells from one or more macro eNBs for supporting the macro cell, selecting an RRU and macro eNB, which the UE wants to attach, among the one or RRUs based on the first status information and the second status information, and simultaneously transmitting an attach request message for requesting network attachment from the selected RRU and macro eNB to the selected RRU and macro eNB. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140335860 | Method of Handling Routing Area Update Procedures and Related Communication Device - A method for handling a Routing Area Update procedure for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a detach request message from a network when the RAU procedure is ongoing; not aborting the RAU procedure when the detach request message is received; and concurrently proceeding with the RAU procedure and a detach procedure corresponding to the detach request message. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140342735 | Proximity-based service registration method and related apparatus - A Proximity-based Service (ProSe) registration method for a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system, used in a Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes: receiving an attach request or a tracking area update request for requesting ProSe UE registration from the UE; retrieving ProSe subscription information and ProSe preference settings related to the UE from a home subscriber server (HSS) of the wireless communication system and storing the ProSe subscription information and the ProSe preference settings related to the UE as a ProSe context of the UE; and transmitting a ProSe registration request including a ProSe identifier of the UE and the ProSe preference settings related to the UE to a ProSe server of the wireless communication system. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140342736 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR LTE NETWORK FOR HIGH-SPEED RAILWAY - In one aspect, a method may include grouping a plurality of wireless communication devices on a moving platform into two or more non-overlapping groups of the wireless communication devices, distributing a first list of tracking areas to the groups of the wireless communication devices, changing the first list of tracking areas to a second list of tracking areas for a first group of the wireless communication devices in response to the moving platform entering into an overlapping region between a first tracking area and a second tracking area of the first list of tracking areas, and changing the first list of tracking areas to the second list of tracking areas for a second group of the wireless communication devices in response to the moving platform entering into an overlapping region between the second tracking area and a third tracking area of the first list of tracking areas. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140349645 | PRESENCE INDICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a new way for a UE to autonomously indicate to the network from which transmission points (TPs) it is able to receive certain broadcast signals. As an example, by receiving in a broadcast signal in the form of a synchronization sequence, the physical identity of a particular TP, a UE infers when it should, if it wishes, send on an UL an indication of its ability to receive the broadcast signal from that TP—i.e., an indication of its presence in the coverage of the TP. The network is then able to take suitable action in response to this, such as adjusting network coverage, enabling or disabling other broadcast channels and controlling paging. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140364118 | Method and Apparatus for Incoming Call Detection in a Dual SIM Single RF Communication Device - A method and apparatus to co-ordinate detection of incoming calls in a multimode dual-SIM single RF chain wireless communications device. Incoming voice over LTE calls cannot be detected by monitoring LTE paging messages. The method and apparatus described detect voice over LTE incoming call SIP signaling in one SIM while also perform paging monitoring for a circuit-switched call in another SIM in the dual-mode dual-SIM communication device. Using a duty cycle that alternates priority between LTE and circuit-switched monitoring ensures that no incoming voice call or text message will be missed. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140370891 | PROXIMATE DEVICE LOCATOR - A user interested in a networked station, such as a mobile station of a particular type, can obtain information to enable the user to locate and/or contact another person with a station of the particular type, e.g. at a location within a set distance from or in proximity to the current location of the user's station. Alternatively, the user of the requesting networked station may provide identities of members of a social media network; and the system can then identify the members who are users of the particular networked station. In either case, the user of the requesting networked station can use the received information to obtain a first-hand review of the particular networked station or to contact another user to request a meeting to view of operate the particular station. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140370892 | Software Feed Forward Strategy to Avoid Hand-Shaking Delays Between Software and Firmware - Methods for enabling a mobile device to efficiently resolve coexistence issues in a DSDA configuration by utilizing a feed forward strategy to avoid hand-shaking between software-implemented operations and firmware. The mobile device may employ a dual subscription, dual active (or “DSDA”) configuration in which two or more subscriptions may be associated with concurrently active communications, such as voice or data calls. The mobile device may be configured to predict activity associated with the concurrently active subscriptions, such as determining operations likely to be performed in a future time period. Such predicted activity information, as well as predefined actions and priority information, may be provided to a library common to both subscriptions. Firmware of the subscriptions may use the common library to detect current conflicts, such as desense, as well as actions to perform to resolve coexistence issues, such as blanking operations. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140378132 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO IDENTIFY, DETECT AND OBTAIN SERVICE ON A CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP (CSG) CELL - Various configurations and arrangements of various systems and methods for identifying, detecting and obtaining service on closed subscriber group systems are disclosed. A method in accordance with the disclosure includes receiving first information from a first AP that supports a first wireless technology. The first information is indicative of the first AP. The method further includes determining if the first information matches second information stored in a memory in association with third information stored in the memory. The third information is indicative of a second AP that supports a second wireless technology. The method further includes, upon determining, that the first information matches the second information, attempting to establish a connection with the second AP based on the third information. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20150011208 | REMOTE CONTROL APPLICATION FOR WIRELESS BOOSTER - A remote control application for remotely a wireless signal booster is located on a remote device, such as a mobile telephone, tablet or computer. The remote control application utilizes a short-range communication interface, such as Bluetooth. This interface allows the user to autonomously register and remotely monitor the performance of the booster and can typically be used to configure, control, enable, shut down, and perform other operations related to the booster, such providing customer support, product registration, and other types of support for the booster operation. The system is most effective when the external device is a mobile device receiving telecommunication service through the repeater. In this case, the mobile device simultaneously displays two signal strength indicators, one for signals received by the mobile device itself and the other for signals received by the tower-side antenna of the wireless repeater. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150011209 | REGISTRATION OF NODES AT REMOTE SITES - Systems and methods for providing registration at a remote site that may include, for example, a monitoring module that may communicate with a remote site. A registration protocol may be used by the monitoring module and the remote site in generating the messages communicated during the registration process. The monitoring module may gather and generate various identification information to be included in the registration protocol messages. The registration information provided by the monitoring module maybe stored at the remote site in a database server having a database. A confirmation message may be communicated from the remote site to the monitoring module that may either acknowledge successful registration or report that an error occurred during the registration process. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150017983 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING PHYSICAL CELL IDENTITY ASSIGNMENT IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method of providing a physical cell identity (PCI) assignment by a management server for small-cell base stations (BSs) in a heterogeneous network environment includes setting a location coordinate and radius for the small-cell BSs; grouping every first preset number of small-cells together to define one femto zone; constructing a location map for each femto zone; grouping every second preset number of femto zones to define one femto group; and constructing a location map for each femto group. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150017984 | Method For A Secure Detach Procedure In A Radio Telecommunication Network - A method for performing a detach of a terminal registered to a telecommunication network is disclosed. The detach is performed by associating an identification for the terminal, deriving a signature for the identification, and allocating a pair consisting of the identification and the signature to the terminal. The method further includes sending the detach request including the identification and the identification signature from the registered terminal to the network. The detach request is received at the network and compared to a record of registration data of the terminal kept at the network. The terminal is detached from the network if the received detach request coincides with the record of registration data. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150024746 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT DEVICE, HOME BASE STATION, AND BASE STATION - A communication control method applied to a mobile communication system, the mobile communication system including a home base station that forms a specific cell and a mobility management device that performs verification of a user terminal for access permission to the specific cell in a handover procedure of the user terminal to the specific cell, comprises a step A of transmitting, by the mobility management device, verification failure information indicating failure of the verification to the home base station when the verification is failed after the user terminal establishes a connection to the specific cell in the handover procedure and a step B of starting, by the home base station, a re-handover procedure of the user terminal to another cell from the specific cell while maintaining the connection in response to reception of the verification failure information from the mobility management device. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150024747 | FEMTOCELL ACCESS PROVISIONING BASED ON SOCIAL NETWORK, PRESENCE, AND USER PREFERENCES - Femtocell access is provisioned based on social network, presence and/or user preference information. In particular, the disclosed system can include a femto access manager that can identify a list of ‘close friends’, to which the femtocell owner is likely to grant femtocell access, based on an analysis of access data (e.g., data from social networks, communication logs, calendars, address books, websites and/or blogs, transaction related data, and the like). Further, an access priority associated with each of the close friends can be determined based in part on location data, availability data, and/or predefined policies. Furthermore, the femto access control list, within the femto access point (FAP), can be populated, dynamically and/or automatically, with the highest priority friends from the close friends list. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150024748 | SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a service processing method and apparatus in a communication network. In the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention, the second mobility management network element can determine, according to the received indication information, whether to send a message to the HSS or HLR or whether to activate the ISR, so that in a communication system, it is ensured that a user equipment can carry out a corresponding service, and signaling transmission in the communication network can be further reduced, thereby improving network performance. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150038139 | METHOD FOR REGISTERING WSO IN COEXISTENCE NETWORK - Provided is a method for registering TVWS devices for coexistence of television white space (TVWS) devices in a television white space (TVWS), the method performed a server and comprising receiving a registration request message for registration or update registration of at least one TVWS device from at least one management device; performing the registration or update registration of at least one TVWS device; and in response to the registration request message, transmitting a registration response message to the at least one management device, wherein the registration response message includes at least one of an identifier field of an interface device connected to the at least one TVWS device, a status field indicating a result of the registration or the update registration, and a reason field indicating a reason why the registration or the update registration is failed if the registration or the update registration is failed. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150045026 | SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF EXPEDITIONARY TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEPLOYMENTS - A system and method for enabling voice and broadband data delivery to users in expeditionary deployments is disclosed. More specifically the system is composed of a registration server, a wireless telco network server, a wide area transport network, and an external network interconnect (like satellite or fiber location) such that when users arrive at a disaster scene where communications infrastructure has been destroyed or is unavailable, they are either handed a smart device (smartphone, laptop, tablet, etc.) or they utilize an existing smart device they brought with them (BYOD) and via the Wi-Fi interface they connect to the wide area transport network. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150045027 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR AUTONOMOUSLY PERFORMING AN IMPLICIT DETACH OPERATION - A device can communicate wirelessly with another device in a wireless communication system and is arranged to receive configuring information defining a detach configuration. By using the detach configuration, the device can autonomously perform an implicit detach operation thus terminating a communication link between the device and the other device. Optionally, when the detach configuration includes an explicit detach mode, the device transmits an indicating signal indicating the detach operation. The indicating signal transmitted by the device may comprise a DETACH REQUEST message. Preferably the device can store the configuring information and can store program information, and can perform the detach operation by using the stored program information and the stored configuring information. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150050933 | Transmission of Information to a UE for Promoting the Selection of a Particular Cell - Methods and apparatus for mobility control are disclosed. A network entity can generate information promoting at least one cell for selection by at least one mobile device and associate the information with at least one physical cell identity available for selection. The information is then communicated to the at least one mobile device. The at least one mobile device can then take the information into account in cell selection. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150056991 | SINGLE NETWORK REGISTRATION WHERE MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS ACCESS THE NETWORK USING SEPARATE PROCESSORS - The disclosure is directed to providing a single network registration for a first application on a first processor and a second application on a second processor of a user equipment (UE). An aspect initiates a network registration using a registration manager on the first processor, adds, from the second processor, first registration information for the second application to the registration manager on the first processor, and appends the network registration with the first registration information using the first processor. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150056992 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station in a mobile communication system in which a CoMP cooperating set and a user terminal perform communication therebetween, comprises: an acquisition unit that acquires transmission delay between itself and a neighboring base station; and a registration unit that registers the neighboring base station as a base station to be included in the CoMP cooperating set when the transmission delay acquired by the acquisition unit is smaller than a threshold. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150056993 | CONNECTED MODE MOBILITY BETWEEN RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a user equipment performs an inter-radio access technology (RAT) mobility procedure from a first network to a second network while idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) is active, locally deactivates ISR in connection with completion of the inter-RAT mobility procedure, and initiates a location management procedure in the second network. Depending on the respective type of the first and second network, and the connection state of the UE with respect to the first network, the mobility procedure may be performed in response to a mobility command received from the first network, or in response to a mobility condition of the first network as detected by the UE. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150065129 | M2M DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION METHODS THEREOF - M2M devices and communication methods thereof are provided. The communication method is adopted by a M2M device, including: establishing a traffic channel with a base station; transmitting M2M data via the traffic channel; determining that the M2M device is going to be powered down; and transmitting power-down registration information via the traffic channel. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150072681 | SERVICING CONTROL UNITS OF MOTOR VEHICLES VIA MOBILE RADIO - In a method for wireless exchange of device data between a control unit of a motor vehicle and a vehicle-external computing device, a mobile radio connection is established between a mobile radio module of the motor vehicle and a mobile radio cell of a radio station coupled with the computing device. The device data are transmitted via the mobile radio connection. The radio station provides a private mobile radio cell which is different from all mobile radio cells of public mobile radio networks able to reach the motor vehicle. To establish the mobile radio connection in the motor vehicle, the mobile radio module is reconfigured for registering with the private mobile radio cell by using a SIM card. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150072682 | GLOBAL PLATFORM FOR MANAGING SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULES - A method of operating a mobile wireless network comprising: receiving, by a provisioning server, a signal from a mobile wireless network specifying a location of a first mobile device having a first International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) and operating in the mobile wireless network under a first condition, the mobile wireless network including a plurality of mobile switching centers (MSCs) and a plurality of mobile devices operating in the mobile wireless network; provisioning the first IMSI in the first HLR based on a state transition rule from a first provisioning state to a second provisioning state; provisioning a second IMSI in the first HLR based on the state transition rule from a third provisioning state to the first provisioning state; and transmitting data identifying the second IMSI to the first mobile device to allow the first mobile device to operate in the mobile wireless network under a second condition. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150079982 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR ACTIVATING A MOBILE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for activating a mobile terminal to communicate over a communication network are provided. The method includes retrieving, by a terminal, provisioning data associated with the communication network, transferring, by the terminal, the provisioning data to the mobile terminal, and configuring communication settings of the mobile terminal using the provisioning data. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150079983 | FEMTOCELL MESSAGE DELIVERY AND NETWORK PLANNING - Techniques for femtocell message delivery and network planning are described herein. A mobile device sends a registration request to an access point, such as a femtocell access point. If denied registration, the mobile device may return to service by a macro cell access point. A network entity, such as a femtocell gateway serving the access point, may determine an identification of the mobile device. The network entity may send the identification of mobile device and an identifier of the access point to an application server. The application server may create and send a targeted message to the mobile device based on the identification of mobile device and the identifier of the access point. The application server may determine a user count for the access point and facilitate network planning based on the user count. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150079984 | NETWORK REGISTRATION SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING COMMUNICATOR ON NETWORK AND NETWORK DEVICE THEREFOR - In a network registration system including a communicator to be registered on a network and a register registering the communicator on the network, either of the communicator and the register includes a check information generator generating a check information signal according to check information for prompting the user to check that the communicator is treated as an object to be registered in the network registration system; and a check information output section outputting the check information signal in a form sensible to the user. The other of the communicator and the register includes an evaluation criterion supplier supplying evaluation criterion information allowing the user to evaluate the suitability of the check information emitted from the check information output section. Thus, the network registration system can prevent an incorrect registration while easily registering the communicator to the network. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150079985 | Out-Of-Service Recovery for a Multi-SIM Wireless device - Methods, devices, and systems embodiments enable recovering from an out-of-service state in a wireless device. A processor may perform scans of first and second acquisition databases to acquire a first renewed service connection for a first subscriber identification module (SIM). The scans include first and second searches for first channels identified in first and second technology lists, respectively, from the first and second acquisition database, respectively, until either a renewed service connection is acquired or each of the first and second technology lists are exhausted. The first and second technology lists identify channels from a most recently used radio access technology of the respective acquisition databases. The processor may perform a full frequency scan to acquire a first renewed service connection for the first SIM in response to determining that each of the first and second technology lists were exhausted. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150087303 | Systems, Methods, and Apparatus for Geolocation Platform Mechanics - Systems, apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture provide for geolocating a user and/or a user device, based on one or more location data sources. Some embodiments may include use of a user authentication process (e.g., a two-factor authentication service) to improve confidence in the determined location of a user device. In one embodiment, a user and/or a user device may be allowed or denied access to restricted access content based on the determined location of the device. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150087304 | MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION SUBSCRIPTION CONTROL - An apparatus is configured to operate as a subscriber server. The apparatus comprises a memory for storing the subscription information of one or more Machine Type Communications, MTC, subscribers, the subscription information of a MTC subscriber including one or more MTC Features and information regarding the MTC subscriber's subscribed services, a processor for assessing which of the one or more subscribed MTC Features are supported, assessing any interaction that may occur between each of the supported subscribed MTC Features and between each of the supported subscribed MTC Features and the subscribed services, and determining the subscription information that should be sent to the serving node based on the outcome of the assessments, and a transmitter for sending the determined subscription information to the serving node. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150087305 | TERMINAL REGISTRATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a terminal registration method, device, and system, and relate to the field of communications technologies, so as to ensure that a terminal determines in time whether registration is successful, and save network resources. The method includes: starting, by an access point device, monitoring on a monitored resource when the access point device receives an access request message sent by a terminal; and after the terminal sends a registration request message to a database, if the access point device receives, when the monitored resource monitored by the access point device does not reach a monitoring threshold, a registration response message sent by the database, stopping the monitoring on the monitored resource. Embodiments of the present invention are used for terminal registration. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150094060 | Handling of Subscriber Deregistration - A system, methods, node, and non-transitory computer readable medium storing a computer program, for deregistration of a user equipment from the source control node are described. The user equipment is registered in the source control node and in a subscriber database while roaming from the source control node to a target control node. The method in the source control node comprises receiving an identification request message from the target control node, the identification request requesting identification and security related information. The method in the source control node further comprises, as triggered by the identification request message, starting a time supervision supervising reception of a cancel location message from the subscriber database. When the time supervision expires, the user equipment is deregistered from the source control node. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150094061 | Identification of Relay Nodes in a Communication Network - A relay node identified by a unique relay node identifier relays communications between a donor base station and one or more user terminals. The donor base station acquires the relay node identifier during a relay node attach procedure from where the relay node or another node in the core network (e.g., mobile management entity). The donor base station may use the relay node identifier to retrieve configuration information for the relay node. The configuration information may be used to configure the relay node, to perform radio resource management functions, and/or to monitor the performance of the relay node. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150099515 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUAL REPLICATION OF A MOBILE PHONE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a system and method for virtual replication a mobile phone device. According to one example embodiment, a user of the mobile device registers with a virtual host server configured to communicate with a telecommunication service provider. A communication identifier associated with the mobile device is transferred to the virtual host server. Furthermore, user phone data collected by the virtual host server from a virtual mobile phone application running on the mobile phone device. In addition, telephonic communication and date access functionality afforded by the mobile phone is capable of being replicated on an auxiliary computing device using the communication identifier and personal data generated by the virtual host server. | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150105073 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TERMINAL REGISTRATION WITH A REGISTRATION SERVER - Access terminals are adapted to communicate with registration servers to enable a registration server to perform timer-based registrations on behalf of an access terminal. The access terminal can cease performing such timer-based registrations as long as the registration server performs the registrations, and may power down until event data is available for transmission or reception. When a registration server performs timer-based registrations on behalf of an access terminal, the registration server can periodically communicate with a network entity to conduct the timer-based registrations for the access terminal. The network entity can receive a timer-based registration message from a registrations server for registering an access terminal. In response to such a message, the network entity can register the access terminal. Sensors and controllers may be used with some embodiments to collect and analyze data and for potentially taking action. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 04-16-2015 |
| 20150111573 | Image-Based Remote Subscriber Identity Module Activation - A telecommunication device configured to capture an image of a unique identifier or a data representation code is described herein. The unique identifier or data representation code is associated with a subscriber identification module (SIM) for accessing a telecommunication service of a telecommunication service provider. The telecommunication device is further configured to provide the image or data extracted from the image to a remote activation server of the telecommunication service provider and receive, in response, an indication that the telecommunication service has been activated for the SIM. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150111574 | RELAY DEVICE, WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a wireless terminal device related to a predetermined service or group, a relay device, a base station device to be connected to the relay device, a gateway device, and a mobile management device. In the relay device included in the communication system, a registration processing unit transmits to the mobile management device, a first registration request signal that requests registration of the relay device, and receives first communication path information indicating a communication path between the relay device and the gateway device. A device determination unit receives from the wireless terminal device, a connection request signal that requests connection, and determines based on the connection request signal whether or not to transfer data related to the wireless terminal device. A data transfer unit transfers the data using the communication path indicated by the first communication path information. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150119031 | TECHNIQUES FOR IDENTIFICATION AND VALUATION USING A MULTI-POINT RADIO FINGERPRINT - Examples are disclosed for radio fingerprinting and for device identification and valuation using a multi-point radio fingerprint. In some examples radio fingerprinting logic may be operative for execution on a processor component to receive a set of radio frequency signals from multiple mobile computing devices at a first time, store identification information for the set of radio frequency signals, receive a subset of the set of radio frequency signals from one of the multiple mobile computing devices at a second time, associate identification information for the subset of radio frequency signals to the one mobile computing device, and generate a multi-point radio fingerprint for the one mobile computing device based on the subset of radio frequency signals. In other embodiments, radio fingerprinting logic may be operative for execution on a processor component to generate a multi-point radio fingerprint for a mobile computing device, the multi-point radio fingerprint comprising a generic identifier associated with a set of radio frequency signals output by the mobile computing device, receive device information for the mobile computing device based on identification information contained in one or more of the set of radio frequency signals, assign a device value to the mobile computing device based on the device information, and correlate the device value to the multi-point radio fingerprint. Other examples are described and claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150119032 | HANDLING TRACKING AREA UPDATE REJECT WITHOUT EXTENDED DELAY - A method, apparatus and computer program product are described for reducing delay when making a network connection between user equipment (UE) and a network node when a tracking area update (TAU) request has been deniedduring LTE reselection. Following a revised signaling protocol, a UE can avoid activation of a NAS Attach Retry timer and move directly to establishing a connection to the network, reducing the UE communications delay from about eleven seconds to less than one second. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150133116 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR CELLULAR-BASED COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments are provided for registering an electronic device of a subscriber for cellular-based communications. According to certain aspects, the cellular-based communications may be facilitated by a data center while the electronic device is not easily within range of a cellular network, such as when the electronic device is traveling on an aircraft. The registration includes associating a subscription identification of a cellular services plan with an identification of the electronic device, from which a registration server may create an account associated with the cellular-based communications. Further, the registration server may generate a digital certificate using the electronic device identification and issue the digital certificate to the electronic device. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150133117 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TWO-PART ELECTRONIC DEVICE REGISTRATION - Embodiments are provided for registering an electronic device of a subscriber for cellular-based communications. According to certain aspects, the cellular-based communications may be facilitated by a data center while the electronic device is not easily within range of a cellular network, such as when the electronic device is traveling on an aircraft. A first, ground-based part of the registration includes creating an account for the electronic device that indicates an identification of the electronic device retrieved from a home network of the subscriber. A second, air-based part of the registration includes connecting to the electronic device via an on-board communications system and communicating with the home network to indicate that the location of the electronic device is known. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150133118 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALL DELIVERY - Example embodiments disclosed herein relate to implementing a circuit-switched (CS) call delivery to a mobile device. An unstructured supplementary service data (USSD) message is sent to the mobile device to return to a CS domain. If the mobile device has returned to a first mobile switching center (MSC) of the CS domain, the call is delivered. If the mobile device has not returned to the first MSC, a duration of time set for the mobile device to register with a second MSC of the CS domain and the call is delivered if registration is complete within the duration of time. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150141009 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PATH CONTROL - An object is to provide a communication system and a method for path control that can realize flexible routing in a mobile communication network. The communication system according to the present invention includes a data transfer apparatus ( | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150141010 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVE REGISTRATION IN A MULTI-BEAM SYSTEM - A system and method for selective registration of a user equipment (UE) to one of a plurality of access points (APs). An indication may be received that each of a plurality of APs have received a signal from a UE. The UE may be registered to the first one of the plurality of APs to satisfy registration requirements associated with the UE. Information may be reported to a controller related to the signal strength of communication received at each AP from the UE. If the signal strength received at the registered AP is less than the signal strength received at one or more of the non-registered APs by more than a threshold amount, the registration of the UE to the registered AP may be rejected. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150148036 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND MEDIA FOR SMALL CELL IDLE MODE MOBILITY - Systems and methods for small cell idle mode mobility include receiving, at a first small cell of a preconfigured cluster of small cells, a mobility area update request from a user equipment (UE). The method can also include registering location information of the UE with a small cell gateway, and retrieving a core network periodic timer for the UE from a mobility server. If certain conditions are met, the first small cell forwards the mobility area update request to a core network via the small cell gateway. Otherwise, the method can include the first small cell updating the location information of the UE with the mobility server, generating a locally-generated mobility area update accept message, and sending a locally generated mobility area update accept message to the UE along with a local periodic timer instructing the UE to send another mobility area update request when the local periodic timer expires. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150148037 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) INFORMATION OF CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system for obtaining information relating to an idle mobile station in a cellular network is provided. The system includes a computing platform which is in communication with a radio network controller of the cellular network. The computing platform is configured for (i) generating and sending an input signal through the radio network controller to the radio access network; and (ii) identifying in data outputted by the radio network controller an output signal resulting from the input signal, the output signal including information relating to at least one idle mobile station. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150312824 | System and Method for Providing Mobile Wireless Data Network Connectivity Via Vehicle-Installed Small Cell - A system is described for managing in-vehicle small cell gateway (IV-SCG) connections with a mobile wireless device. A home IV-SCG maintains a list identifying a set of neighboring SCG nodes, each one of the set of neighboring SCG nodes being a potential candidate for establishing a connection with the home IV-SCG forming a link along a data communications path between the home IV-SCG and the broadband network data resource. The home IV-SCG detects a triggering condition causing the home IV-SCG to seek out an alternative data communications path for the current data communications path. Thereafter, the home IV-SCG selects a partner neighboring SCG, from the neighboring SCG list, through which the alternative communications path passes, based upon a handover criterion based upon at least a capacity of individual ones of the set of neighboring SCG nodes to support current data communication requirements of a registered mobile wireless device. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312844 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP ACCESS CONTROL - An apparatus for providing closed subscriber group access control may include a processor. The processor may be configured to maintain a non-access register including an identifier of a communication cell associated with a closed subscriber group to which a communication device associated with the non-access register does not have access rights, and enable subsequent communication with another communication cell based on the other communication cell not being identified in the non-access register. A corresponding method and computer program product are also provided. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312872 | Method, Device and System for Recording Attendance - The disclosure provides a method device and system for recording an attendance. The method includes that: a Femto ( | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312874 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING A MOBILE DEVICE WITH SERVICE CONTINUITY OVER MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORKS - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, registering with a first access network to generate a first registration, detecting a triggering event, and registering with a second access network to generate a second registration while maintaining the first registration with the first access network. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150319726 | NETWORK ELEMENTS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREFOR - A method and apparatus for periodically assigning new, unique Location Area Codes to each cell comprising a femto-cell network ( | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319727 | USER EQUIPMENT REGISTRATION METHOD, PROXIMITY SERVICE SERVER, AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY - The present invention provides a user equipment registration method, a proximity service server, and a mobility management entity. The user equipment registration method includes: receiving, by a network side device, a proximity service request sent by a user equipment; assigning a D | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319736 | USER EQUIPMENT WITH TIMER CONTROLLER - As a result of ISR being enabled between a portable terminal device and a network which are capable of communicating by using the communication protocols of a plurality of wireless access technologies, the portable terminal device performs position registration processing between the plurality of wireless access technologies and the portable terminal device each time a fixed period of time elapses, and the portable terminal device is able to move between the plurality of wireless access technologies that have already been registered, without conducting new position registration processing. At this time, if there is a possibility of there being a difference in ISR states (activated or not activated) between the portable terminal device and the network, the portable terminal device ignores any instructions issued by the network for ISR to be enabled in the portable terminal device. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150327215 | User Equipment and Paging Method and System Using an Extended Paging Period - Disclosed are a user equipment and a method and a system using an extended paging period to page. In the method, the MME/SGSN negotiates with a UE to obtain a first extended paging period; the MME/SGSN sends the first extended paging period and paging indication information which indicates to use the first extended paging period to page to a radio access network; the radio access network sends the first extended paging period in the system information and uses the first extended paging period to send a paging message; the UE selects a second extended paging period according to an extended paging period needed by the UE itself and the first extended paging period, and monitors the paging message according to the second extended paging period. The embodiment of the present application enables a UE in an idle mode to achieve an energy-saving effect by using the extended paging period. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150334672 | METHOD, CONTROL NODE, GATEWAY AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATION WITH A NEWLY DETECTED DEVICE - A method, control node, gateway and computer programs in a communications network for enabling communication with a newly detected device connected to the network. The method comprises receiving a request message including an id associated with the newly detected device from a gateway, and retrieving configuration data associated with the device based on the id, from a device vendor database, where the device vendor database is indicated by the id. The method further comprises providing a resource in the communications network based on the configuration data, acknowledging the request message to the gateway, thereby enabling the device to communicate with the resource in the communications network. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334675 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of registering an entity of a secondary radio access technology (RAT) system in a management device of a primary RAT system in a wireless communication system is provided. The primary RAT system may be a cellular system, and the management device of the primary RAT system may be one of eNodeB (eNB), mobility management entity (MME), or a new entity. The second RAT system may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, and the entity of the secondary RAT system may be an access point (AP). The AP registration method may be initiated by the AP, or a general device, e.g., a multi radio access technology (RAT) device supporting a plurality of RATs. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150341887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PRE-REGISTRATION OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for a base station of an asynchronous wireless communication system placed in an area where subnets of a synchronous wireless communication system overlap each other to control pre-registration of a user equipment with the synchronous wireless communication system. The method may include: determining, by at least one base station placed in the area where subnets overlap each other, a virtual subnet ID to be used and transmitting the virtual subnet ID to a user equipment; receiving a call setup request message from the user equipment; and transmitting the call setup request message and subnet ID information corresponding to the actual location of the base station to a Mobility Management Entity (MME). | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150358835 | OPTIMIZATION OF NETWORK RESOURCE UTILIZATION - Disclosed is a method for optimizing signaling in a mobile communication network, wherein a terminal devices equipped with a subscription is attempting to register to the mobile communication network. The method includes detecting an indication on an unsuccessful registering attempt; updating a counter value maintained for the subscription, the counter value indicating a number of the unsuccessful registering attempts; comparing the updated counter value with a predetermined maximum counter value; and if the updated counter value meets the predetermined maximum counter value instructing to disable a radio communication of the terminal device. Also disclosed are a terminal device computer program code and a subscription. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150373532 | OPERATING A DATA BACK END NODE IN A DATA LAYERED ARCHITECTURE NETWORK - A method and apparatus for operating a data back end node in a data layered architecture network. A database of subscriber data is maintained at a database such that the data is organized into at least one data group. The data associated with each subscriber is associated with a data group. A virtual Home Location Register identifier is assigned to the data group. At least a part of the subscriber data and the virtual HLR identifier is sent to an HLR front end node. In the event of a reset by a Core Network node, only subscriber data associated with the identified data group will need to be rebuilt. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373577 | NETWORK CONGESTION CONTROL - A method, a device, and a non-transitory storage medium to obtain a traffic volume value that indicates a volume of traffic to and/or from a radio node, a value that indicates a class of the radio node, or a received signal strength value that indicates a received signal strength of a macro signal received by the radio node; calculate a delay time value based on traffic volume value, the value that indicates the class, or the received signal strength value; and transmit the delay time value to the radio node, wherein the delay time value indicates a time period to wait, by the radio node, before attempting to authenticate and register with one or more network devices. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373662 | Enhancement for Power Down Sequence - When a cellular telephone is powered down, it sends a power-down message to a network it was previously registered with. If the network does not send, or if the cellular telephone does not receive, an acknowledgement of the power-down message from the network, a status bit referred to as a flag is set (or reset) in a non-volatile memory device in the cellular telephone. The power-down sequence is concluded by the cellular telephone and, the cellular telephone is shut off or put into a reduced power consumption state. When the telephone is turned back on, i.e., returned to its previous state, the flag is evaluated or “tested” to see if it was set (or reset) during the course of powering down. The status or value of the flag when the phone is powered up is then used by the cellular telephone to determine whether it should make a network access request to a network the telephone was registered to, during the power-up operation in order to cause that cellular network to update its database regarding the whereabouts of the powered-up cellular telephone. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150381416 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF DEVICES - The method is for automatic provisioning of a device. The system has a device, a hub, a server and a communication device. A communication is established between the device and the hub. The hub characterizes the device as being unmanaged. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382172 | INDIVIDUALIZED SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND CENTRAL DEVICE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION THEREOF - A short-range radio communication method is presented including the steps of defining a region by a first communication device, the first communication device in operable communication with a plurality of second communication devices, each of the plurality of second communication devices communicating with different technologies and different protocols and setting up individualized communication between the first communication device and each of the plurality of second communication devices detected within the region defined by the first communication device, and having the different technologies and the different protocols. The first communication device determines which of the different technologies and the different protocols of each of the plurality of second communication devices it is capable of communicating with. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382175 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provides a system and method for extracting information pertaining to a portable wireless communications device ( | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382180 | FEMTOCELL MESSAGE DELIVERY AND NETWORK PLANNING - Techniques for femtocell message delivery and network planning are described herein. A mobile device sends a registration request to an access point, such as a femtocell access point. If denied registration, the mobile device may return to service by a macro cell access point. A network entity, such as a femtocell gateway serving the access point, may determine an identification of the mobile device. The network entity may send the identification of mobile device and an identifier of the access point to an application server. The application server may create and send a targeted message to the mobile device based on the identification of mobile device and the identifier of the access point. The application server may determine a user count for the access point and facilitate network planning based on the user count. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20160007185 | Terminal Registration Method, Terminal Discovery Methods, Terminals and Devices - Provided are a terminal registration method, terminal discovery methods, a terminal and a service device. The service device includes: a registration component ( | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007187 | Method of Identifying Visited Public Land Mobile Network and Related Communication Device - A method of identifying a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN) comprises a proximity service (ProSe) function in a home PLMN (HPLMN) of an announcing user equipment (UE) receiving a match report message comprising a ProSe Application Code from a ProSe function in a HPLMN of a monitoring UE; and the ProSe function in the HPLMN of the announcing UE transmitting a match response message comprising a ProSe Application ID Name of the ProSe Application Code and a PLMN ID of a VPLMN registered by the announcing UE to the ProSe function in the HPLMN of the monitoring UE to respond to the match report message. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007311 | NODE OUTPUT FACILITATES COMMUNICATION WITH REMOTE SITE - Systems and methods for providing registration at a remote site that may include, for example, a monitoring module that may communicate with a remote site. A registration protocol may be used by the monitoring module and the remote site in generating the messages communicated during the registration process. The monitoring module may gather and generate various identification information to be included in the registration protocol messages. The registration information provided by the monitoring module maybe stored at the remote site in a database server having a database. A confirmation message may be communicated from the remote site to the monitoring module that may either acknowledge successful registration or report that an error occurred during the registration process. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007338 | Resource Allocation For Direct Terminal-To-Terminal Communication In A Cellular System - There are provided measures for resource allocation for direct terminal-to-terminal communication in a cellular system, said measures exemplarily comprising configuration of common resources for supporting direct communication between terminals across a predefined registration area comprising one or more cells of a cellular system, and control of an allocation of common resources for enabling direct communication between terminals across the predefined registration area. Said measures may exemplarily be applied for establishing terminal-to-terminal communication in LTE or LTE-Advanced cellular networks. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160021527 | SMART CARD PERSONNALIZATION - A smart card associated with a subscription to a first telecommunication network and coupled with a communication is personalized by an application server. The server receives a request of subscription change having an identifier of a second telecommunication network; establishes a secured session with a home location register of the second telecommunication network identified by the identifier and receives a first message having a second international identity and a second authentication key from the home location register; and then sends a second message having a personalization command, an admin code, the second international identity and the second authentication key to the communication device. The smart card is able to interpret the personalization command to delete the first international identity and the first authentication key and replace them by the second international identity and the second authentication key if the admin code is valid. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021691 | ASSOCIATING A DEVICE WITH ANOTHER DEVICE'S NETWORK SUBSCRIPTION - Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communication at a network entity are described. A user equipment (UE) may obtain identification information for a device and may assist in establishing credentials by which the device accesses a wireless network, e.g., a cellular network. The UE may establish a connection with the wireless network using its own credentials. A device subscription administration server, which may be an entity within the wireless network core, may authenticate the device based on the identification information, which may include registering the device to access the wireless network, e.g., using different credentials than those of the UE, by associating the device identification information with the credentials of the UE. Once registered, the device may communicate with the wireless network. The device subscription administration server may then establish access parameters and communicate them to the UE, which may transmit them to the device over communication link. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160037472 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING REGISTRATION BACKUP DATA - A method, an apparatus, and a system for processing registration backup data are disclosed. A Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) receives a request from a User Equipment (UE) and judges whether the request carries multi-registration information so as to decide whether to add multi-registration indication information into a Server Assignment Request (SAR) message sent to a Home Subscriber Server (HSS). The HSS performs operations according to whether the SAR message carries the multi-registration indication information, therefore avoiding unnecessary signaling interactions, reducing the signaling load, avoiding unnecessary data processing between the HSS and the S-CSCF, and saving system resources. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037473 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT AND A MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY THEREOF - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and method for establishing connection between a User Equipment (UE) and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) in the wireless communication system in which the data-centric terminal requests the mobility management entity for attachment and checks, when the mobility management entity responds, data-centric features supported by the mobility management entity. According to the present invention, it is possible to connect the data-centric terminal to the mobility management entity supporting the data-centric features of the corresponding data-centric terminal efficiently in the wireless communication system. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037476 | METHOD FOR A SECURE DETACH PROCEDURE IN A RADIO TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for performing a detach of a terminal registered to a telecommunication network is disclosed. The detach is performed by associating an identification for the terminal, deriving a signature for the identification, and allocating a pair consisting of the identification and the signature to the terminal. The method further includes sending the detach request including the identification and the identification signature from the registered terminal to the network. The detach request is received at the network and compared to a record of registration data of the terminal kept at the network. The terminal is detached from the network if the received detach request coincides with the record of registration data. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160044624 | REDUCING FREQUENT HANDOFFS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for reducing frequent idle handoffs of a wireless communication device is described. A registration request is received by a base station or a femto access point from the wireless communication device. The number of registration requests received from the wireless communication device are counted while the registration timer is running. It is determined that frequent handoffs are happening when the number of registration requests received is greater than a registration threshold. A transmit power of a femto access point is adjusted if the number of registration requests received indicates that frequent handoffs are happening. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160057606 | INDIVIDUALIZED SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND CENTRAL DEVICE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION THEREOF - A short-range radio communication method is presented including the steps of introducing a first communication device; introducing a plurality of second communication devices in operable communication with the first communication device; detecting one or more signals emitted from the plurality of second communication devices; identifying one or more of the plurality of second communication devices emitting the one or more signals by a unique identifier; and setting up an individualized communication between the first communication device and the one or more second communication devices detected and identified within a region defined by the first communication device. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057724 | PAGING OVER NON-CELLULAR AND CELLULAR RATs - Mobile devices may be paged via non-cellular or cellular radio access technologies (RATs). Mobile devices may determine that they are capable of receiving a paging message via a non-cellular RAT, and they indicate to a network that they are capable of such paging. Accordingly, in addition to cellular paging, mobile devices may be paged for cellular or non-cellular data via a non-cellular RAT. Non-cellular paging may be facilitated by a non-cellular paging server, which may be an independent network-side entity or may be an aspect of another network entity, such as an mobility management entity (MME). | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057725 | SECURITY METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING RE-SUBSCRIPTION OR ADDITIONAL SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION POLICY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Provided is a system that enables a device to perform a communication function. A communication method for a user equipment (UE) may include: sending a subscription request for a first network; receiving information regarding an identifier of a first profile associated with the first network and the date on which the first profile is deactivated; and determining whether a subscription to the first network is allowed on the basis of the date information. Accordingly, in an environment such as Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN), GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) or Evolved UTRAN (EUTRAN), when a device having an eSIM attempts to make a re-subscription to an MNO, or when the device attempts to make a re-subscription or additional subscription to an MNO according to a national electricity or infrastructure plan for M2M equipment, it is possible to accommodate MNO policies and determine whether a re-subscription to an MNO is allowed according to the MNO policies. When MNO re-subscription is not allowed, a lock may be placed so as to update or reconfigure communication and security information in an easy and safe manner. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057789 | CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS FOR TEMPORARILY ASSOCIATING UNIQUE CONNECTION NUMBERS WITH TERMINALS HAVING TOKEN IDENTIFICATION MODULES - A cellular telecommunications network is provided that facilitates communication connections for terminals having identification modules that are not associated with a subscriber record or Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) number. The cellular telecommunications network implements providing a pool of unique connection numbers in response to a request for communication with a device incorporating a token identification module, assigning a selected one of the pooled numbers to the token identification module in a location register; and initiating a reconnection event, thereby providing the assigned number to the device by associating the device with a temporary unique connection number in the location register Embodiments described are directed to Machine-to-Machine (M2M) client terminals with embedded token identification modules. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160066178 | DEVICE ACTIVATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method of activating a first device is disclosed. The method includes: the first device pairing with a second device; receiving a connection request from a second device; connecting to the second device; opening a communication channel to the second device; transmitting an activation package to the second device; receiving an activation payload from the second device; and performing an activation using information from the activation payload. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066190 | ACCESS CONTROL FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUPS - A user equipment receives from a network a transmitted (broadcast) access mode indicator that indicates whether a closed subscriber group CSG network is being operated as open or closed, and if it indicates open a user equipment UE that is not a registered member of the CSG is allowed access to the closed subscriber group network as a guest member. The CSG network can provide higher priority services to its registered members by differentiating them over guest members by an indication, received from each UE in its RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL CONNECTION REQUEST message, whether it is registered or a guest. The CSG can also transmit its ID/name for display at the UE so the UE may select whether and which CSG to join. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160073332 | Systems, Methods, and Computer Program Products for Managing Access to Femtocell Coverage - Systems, methods, and computer program products are for managing access to a femtocell coverage area. An exemplary method includes storing in a memory component a first identifier corresponding to a subscribed service of a communication device and a second identifier corresponding to a user of the communication device, and granting access to the femtocell coverage area using the second identifier. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160080926 | INDIVIDUALIZED SHORT-RANGE RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND CENTRAL DEVICE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION THEREOF - A short-range radio communication method is presented including the steps of introducing a first communication device; introducing a plurality of second communication devices in operable communication with the first communication device; detecting one or more signals emitted from the plurality of second communication devices; identifying one or more of the plurality of second communication devices emitting the one or more signals by a unique identifier; and setting up an individualized communication between the first communication device and the one or more second communication devices detected and identified within a region defined by the first communication device. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081052 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MASS REGISTRATION SCENARIO IN TWO-WAY RADIO SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for managing a mass registration scenario in a two-way radio system. A site controller in a trunked radio system detects a mass registration condition in which registration requests by subscriber units are likely to collide on an inbound control channel. During the mass registration condition, the site controller initiates a restriction period by instructing subscriber units that are members of particular talkgroups to temporarily cease registration requests. Those talkgroup members are permitted to resume their registration requests when a predetermined delay time has passed since the members were instructed to cease registration, or when a particular silence time has passed without registration activity over the control channel. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160088470 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A communication system is disclosed comprising a gateway, a number of base stations, and a mobile device. The gateway holds information mapping address data for each base station to information identifying a respective cell operated by that base station. A base station obtains information identifying a cell operated by a neighbour base station and provides this information to the gateway. The gateway obtains from the information held address data for the neighbour base station based on the information identifying the cell operated by the neighbour base station. The gateway generates and sends a message including address data to the base station. The base station receives the message and establishes a connection with the neighbour base station using the address data. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160100375 | SIP USER RELEASE - A system that releases a Session Initiation Protocol (“SIP”) user from a serving function on an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (“IMS”) network receives a REGISTER refresh from a registered user equipment (“UE”). In response to the REGISTER refresh, the system sends a server assignment request to a home subscriber server (“HSS”) that clears the name of the Serving Call Session Control Function (“S-CSCF”) assigned for the registered user. The system then sends a gateway timeout or server timeout that would trigger the UE to send an initial REGISTER request | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100376 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING A USER WITH A REGISTRATION REVIEW IN IMS SYSTEM - Disclosed are a network-based device, method and computer-readable medium for operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) to provide registration review. The method embodiment includes tracking and storing all current registrations for each user in an IMS system, receiving a request from a user for a status of the user's current registrations and presenting, in response to the request, the current status of current registrations for the user. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160105790 | COMBINED LOCATION UPDATING PROCESSING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A combined location updating processing method is provided, including: receiving, by a mobility management network element, a combined location updating request sent by user equipment; if the user equipment cannot access a current location area due to an area restriction or an access restriction, deleting, by the mobility management network element, all non-emergency bearer contexts of the user equipment, and reserving only an emergency bearer context of the user equipment; and sending, by the mobility management network element, a location updating accept message to the user equipment according to the combined location updating request, where the location updating accept message includes instruction information, and the instruction information is used for instructing the user equipment to enter a circuit switched domain detached state. In addition, other two combined location updating processing methods, and related apparatuses and systems are provided. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105864 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DUAL-CARD USER EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method for a dual-card user equipment and an apparatus. The method includes: receiving, by a first network side device, an access request from a dual-card UE, and establishing a first bearer according to the access request; acquiring, by the first network side device, association information between a first card of the dual-card UE and a second card of the dual-card UE; establishing, by the first network side device, a second bearer according to the association information; splitting, by the first network side device, first data to be transmitted into second data and third data; sending, by the first network side device, the second data to the dual-card UE by using the first bearer, and sending the third data to the dual-card UE by using the second bearer. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105865 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND MEDIA FOR SMALL CELL IDLE MODE MOBILITY - Systems and methods for small cell idle mode mobility include receiving, at a first small cell of a preconfigured cluster of small cells, a mobility area update request from a user equipment (UE). The method can also include registering location information of the UE with a small cell gateway, and retrieving a core network periodic timer for the UE from a mobility server. If certain conditions are met, the first small cell forwards the mobility area update request to a core network via the small cell gateway. Otherwise, the method can include the first small cell updating the location information of the UE with the mobility server, generating a locally-generated mobility area update accept message, and sending a locally generated mobility area update accept message to the UE along with a local periodic timer instructing the UE to send another mobility area update request when the local periodic timer expires. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160112865 | Identity Management for Mobile Devices - A method of managing identities for use in a mobile telecommunications device in a telecommunications network has the following features. The identity management process is triggered and one or more parameters of a currently available mobile telecommunications network detected. An identity database is searched—each record in the identity database comprises an identity and additional identity information for each identity. The additional identity information includes the one or more parameters. The identity management process involves selecting an identity when a first record comprising the one or more parameters detected is found in said searching and modifying an active identity of the mobile telecommunications device to be the selected identity when the active identity is not already the selected identity. This process can be carried out by a subscriber information module of a mobile telecommunications device. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160112980 | REGISTRATION FRAMEWORK FOR CONNECTED CONSUMER DEVICES - A processing device executing a registration service receives information identifying a first device, a second device and an application running on the first device. The processing device determines a registration technique that is supported by both the application and the second device and sends a message indicating the registration technique to at least one of the first device or the second device, wherein the application is to perform an operation associated with the first registration technique to bind the second device to the user account. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160119768 | SELECTIVELY TRIGGERING A COMMUNICATIVE ACTION BASED ON WHETHER A QUORUM CONDITION FOR A PEER-TO-PEER GROUP IS SATISFIED - In an embodiment, a UE obtains one or more quorum conditions for communication with a given group from a set of groups to which the UE is registered. The UE searches, over a P2P interface, to identify one or more group members that are registered to the given group and which are proximate to the UE. The UE determines whether the identified one or more group members are sufficient to satisfy at least one of the one or more quorum conditions. The UE selectively triggers a communicative action associated with the given group based on whether the determining determines the at least one quorum condition to be satisfied. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160135139 | MULTIPLE DEVICE ASSOCIATION WITH A SINGLE TELEPHONE NUMBER - Multiple user devices may be associated with a single telephone number to enable a user to initiate and receive communication via the single telephone number from any of the multiple user devices. An input is received at a service portal of a mobile telecommunication network. The input configures multiple user devices to share a common telephone number to initiate and receive communications. The input is stored as a device association profile in a device association data store that is accessible by a call session control function (CSCF) node of the mobile telecommunication network. The CSCF node then further determines based at least on the device association profile whether a user device is eligible to use the common telephone number to initiate and receive communications via the mobile telecommunication network. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160142860 | METHOD OF PROVIDING MTC MONITORING RELATED INFORMATION - The present disclosure presents a method of providing information by a subscriber information server for machine type communication (MTC) monitoring. The method may include: receiving information on a monitoring related timer for any MTC device from an MTC related server; adjusting one of the monitoring related timer and a periodic access or location update related timer based on the other timer when there is information on the periodic access or location update related timer for the MTC device; and transmitting information on the adjusted timer to the MTC related server or a monitoring node. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160142900 | WIRELESS SERIAL BUS SERVICE CONTINUITY - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and devices are described for continuity of a wireless serial bus (WSB) service across multiple WSB service sessions. A host may perform a discovery process with a device as part of WSB service session establishment. The host may determine an identifier that is unique to the WSB service provided during the first WSB service session and send the unique identifier to the device. If the WSB service session is terminated, the host may establish a second WSB service session with the device using the unique identifier and without performing another discovery process with the device. The WSB service may support universal serial bus (USB) over Wi-Fi services. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160142908 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Distributing Data of Virtual Subscriber Identity Module - A method, an apparatus, and a system for distributing data of a virtual subscriber identity module (VSIM) where a terminal device acquires a graphic code from a distribution client; and acquires the temporary data of the VSIM and the service authentication code that are included in the graphic code; and registers with a mobile network according to the temporary data of the VSIM, and connects to the management server through the mobile network; and sends to the management server, a request for downloading formal data of the VSIM; and if the authentication is passed, the management server acquires formal data that is of the VSIM and corresponding to the service authentication code, and sends the formal data of the VSIM to the terminal device. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160150005 | The Managed Peer-To-Peer Sharing in Cellular Networks - A method, system and apparatus are provided for performing peer-to-peer (P2P) data sharing operations between user equipment (UE) devices in a wireless-enabled communications environment. A first client node comprises content data and operates in a server peer mode to provide content data. A second client node submits a request to a P2P application server (P2P AS) for the content data. In response, the P2P AS provides the address of the first client node to the second client node. The second client node then uses the provided address to submit a request to the first client node to provide the content data. The first client node accepts the request and then provides the content data to the second client node. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150393 | UPDATING CONNECTIVITY WITH A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHODS THEREOF - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a communication device that receives a request to update a registration between the communication device and a communication network without causing the communication device to cycle power or reset. The communication device can postpone a process for releasing bearer communications with the communication network responsive to determining that the request to update registration between the communication device and the communication network can be delayed. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150395 | TECHNIQUES TO ASSOCIATE USER DATA WITH A MOBILE DEVICE - Techniques to associate user data with a mobile device are described. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may comprise a service support component and a storage component. The services support component may be operative to receive a data package request from a service, the data package request comprising a network identifier for a mobile device associated with a user, and exchange a data package with the service in response to the data package request. The storage component may be operative to access the data package associated with the user based on the network identifier. Other embodiments are described and claimed. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150496 | SERVICE REQUEST METHOD, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present description discloses a service request method. The service request method comprises the steps of: increasing a counter whenever a service request message has been transmitted multiple times to a first network node in a first public land mobile network (PLMN), but an acceptance message has not been received by the time a first timer expires; comparing the counter value with an upper threshold value; and running a second timer if the counter value is equal to or greater than the upper threshold value, wherein the transmission of the service request message can be prevented until the second timer expires. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150497 | SERVICE CONTINUITY IN CENTRALIZED SERVICE NETWORK SYSTEM - There are provided measures for enabling/realizing service continuity in a centralized service network system. Such measures exemplarily comprise detecting a deregistration request for deregistering a terminal with respect to a first switching entity from a registration in which the first switching entity is registered for the terminal as a contact point for centralized services, starting a waiting timer for waiting for a registration request for registering the terminal with respect to a second switching entity upon detection of said deregistration request, and re-registering the terminal in the registration such that the second switching entity is registered for the terminal as a contact point for centralized services upon detection of the registration request for registering the terminal with respect to the second switching entity before expiry of the waiting timer. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160157085 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING NETWORK REGISTRATION THROUGH A SELECTED COMPONENT FOR DATA SERVICE | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160157086 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160157273 | Operating a Terminal Device in a Wireless Communication System | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160165430 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BY HNB - The method for establishing a connection by a HNB comprising operations of: the HNB transmitting an “attachment request” message to an operation and maintenance center (OMC); the OMC transmitting an “attachment response” message to the MB; the HNB establishing a connection with an MME indicated by the “attachment response” message. With the method proposed, a UE can switch between HNBs in the same CSG through interface X2. Meanwhile, such information as the radio resource management and so on can be exchanged between two HNBs. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165565 | DEDICATED GATEWAY FOR MOBILE BROADBAND DEVICES - A quite simple and effective way for simplifying the mobile system for the mobile broadband customers, thereby lowering the equipment costs and in the end allowing for more competitive flat rate fees, is to direct the traffic from mobile broadband devices ( | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160174181 | USER TERMINAL AND BASE STATION | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174182 | METHOD FOR HANDLING RADIO ACTIVITIES OF MULTIPLE SIM CARDS EQUIPPED IN A COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS UTILIZING THE SAME | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160183166 | MOBILE HARDWARE IDENTITY IN AN ENVIRONMENT WITH MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160192276 | REJECTION NOTIFICATION TO THE UICC - Registration rejections are reported to a universal integrated circuit card (UICC). Remote access can be provide to registration rejection data stored in the UICC, the registration rejection data can be transmitted to a service provider, one or more UICC applications can be executed based on the registration rejection data, and/or the registration rejection data can be logged or tracked. In addition, action taken by the UICC can be automated based on the registration rejection using artificial intelligence. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192313 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUBSCRIBING FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEMS (IMS) SERVICES REGISTRATION STATUS - A system and method that allows mobile device applications to receive changes in registration status from application services that are accessed via an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). Applications on a mobile device subscribe to receive notifications of changes in registration status for requested services. When a change to the registration status of a service occurs, a notification message is transmitted to the application on the mobile device. Notifications of changes in status are thereby received by each application on a per-application-service basis. In some embodiments, when a request to register with an application service fails, the corresponding notification message includes a reason for the failure. In some embodiments, notification messages are originated by a registration manager that operates in the IMS and transmitted to an IMS client operating on a mobile device. In some embodiments, notification messages are originated by each application service and transmitted directly to subscribed applications. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160198428 | USER EQUIPMENT PROPOSING A DURATION TO BE APPLIED TO A TIME DELAY TO BE SET BY EQUIPMENT OF A CORE NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160205542 | Wireless Device, Network Node, and Methods Therein for Sending a Message Comprising One or More Populated Fields | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205650 | METHOD FOR PREVENTING A UE FROM ENTERING INTO A PERMANENT OUT OF SERVICE STATE | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160255124 | METHOD OF ACCESS PROVISION | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255192 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING NEW WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255492 | NETWORK ELEMENTS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREFOR | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255602 | USER EQUIPMENT AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY AND METHODS FOR PERIODIC UPDATE IN CELLULAR NETWORKS | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255674 | Handling Of Registration Reject In Mobile Communications | 09-01-2016 |
| 20170237782 | IMS RESTORATION SUPPORT FOR TEMPORARY GRUU | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238238 | WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND FIXED TERMINAL CONTROL APPARATUS | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238273 | APPLICATION REGISTRATION METHODS AND APPARATUSES | 08-17-2017 |
| 20180027414 | ACCESS METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, RELATED APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027480 | ELECTRONIC SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULE (eSIM) ASSIGNMENT FOR CARRIER CHANNEL DEVICES | 01-25-2018 |
| 20190149583 | Initial IMS Registration | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190149979 | Method For Distributing Virtual SIM Card, Method For Accessing Network, And Related Devices | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190149980 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVISIONING DEVICES TO UTILIZE SERVICES OF MOBILE NETWORK OPERATORS | 05-16-2019 |
